advertisement
PANTONE2728
®
User
’
’
s Guide
Safety and Legal
Basic User’s Guide
Advanced User’s Guide
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Safety and Legal
MFC-J6510DW/J6710DW
1
Using the documentation
Please read this booklet before attempting to operate the machine, or before attempting any maintenance. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an increased risk of personal injury or damage to property, including through fire, electrical shock, burns or suffocation.
Read all of the instructions. Save them for later reference.
1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are used throughout the documentation.
1
Bold
Italics
Courier
New
Bold typeface identifies specific keys on the machine’s control panel, on the computer screen.
Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Text in Courier New font identifies messages on the
LCD of the machine.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the operation works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Improper Setup icons alert you to devices and operations that are not compatible with the machine.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of fire.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine.
Note
The illustrations in this guide show the
MFC-J6710DW.
Version 0
1
Compilation and Publication
Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication.
1
Choosing a location
Put your machine on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk. Put the machine near a telephone wall jack and a standard AC power outlet. Choose a location where the temperature remains between 50°F and 95°F (10°C and 35°C) and the humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).
1
WARNING
DO NOT expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive gasses, moisture or dust. DO NOT place your machine on a carpet or rug, as this will expose it to dust. Doing so may create a risk of an electrical short or fire. It may also damage the machine and/or render it inoperable.
DO NOT place the machine near heaters, air conditioners, electrical fan, refrigerators, or water.
Doing so may create the risk of a short circuit or fire should water come into contact with the machine (including condensation caused by heating/air conditioning/ventilation equipment).
2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
DO NOT place the machine near chemicals. Should the chemicals come into contact with the machine, there may be a risk of fire. The chemicals may also cause the machine to malfunction or become discolored.
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your machine. Plastic bags are not toys. To avoid the danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose of them properly.
CAUTION
Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area. If you must place it in a high-traffic area, ensure that the machine is in a safe location where it cannot be accidentally knocked-over, which could cause injury to you and serious damage to the machine.
Ensure that cables and cords leading to the machine are secured so as not to pose a tripping hazard.
DO NOT place this machine on an unstable or tilted cart, stand, or table. The machine is heavy and may fall, causing injury to you and serious damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT place your machine next to sources of interference, such as speakers or the base units of non Brother cordless telephones. Doing so may interfere with the operation of the machine's electronic components.
• DO NOT place the machine on any tilted/slanted surface. DO NOT tip the machine after the ink cartridges are installed. Doing so may cause ink spillage and internal damage to the machine.
• DO NOT connect your machine to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic timers. Disruption of power can delete information from the machine's memory, and repeated cycling of the power can damage the machine.
3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To use the machine safely
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of an electrical shock. In addition, you could create an electrical short, which may create the risk of a fire.
1
There are high-voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you access the inside of the machine, including for routine maintenance such as cleaning, make sure you have unplugged the power cord from the AC power outlet, as well as any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45) cables from the machine.
DO NOT push objects of any kind into this machine through slots or openings in the cabinet, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts.
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands.
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.
DO NOT use the machine or handle the cord if the cord has become worn or frayed. If unplugging your machine, DO NOT touch the damaged/frayed part.
DO NOT continue using the machine if it has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
Instead, unplug the machine from the power outlet and contact Brother Authorized Service
Personnel.
4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If water, other liquids, or metal objects get inside the machine, immediately unplug the machine from the AC power outlet and contact Brother Authorized Service Personnel.
DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
Power Cord Safety:
• DO NOT pull on the middle of the AC power cord; pulling on the middle may cause the cord to separate from the plug. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.
• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord.
• DO NOT place this machine where people can walk on the cord.
• DO NOT place this machine in a position where the cord is stretched or strain is otherwise put on the cord, as it may become worn or fray.
• If an extension cord is used with this machine, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the machines plugged into the extension cord DO NOT exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total of all machines plugged into the AC power outlet does not exceed 15 amperes (USA only).
Never touch telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a wet location.
FIRE HAZARDS
Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of a fire.
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray or an organic solvent/liquid that contains alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may also cause an electrical shock.
DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of combustible dust.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
CAUTION
DO NOT sit or stand on the machine or use it for any purpose beyond its intended purpose.
If the machine becomes hot, releases smoke, or generates any strong smells, immediately unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Call Brother Customer Service.
Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers by trapping them in a roller.
DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the machine. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers by pinching them.
6
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
DO NOT touch the area shaded in the illustration. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers by cutting them on the edge of the machine.
DO NOT carry the machine by holding the scanner cover or the Jam Clear Cover. Doing this may cause the machine to slip out of your hands. Only carry the machine by placing your hands under the entire machine.
(MFC-J6510DW)
1
(MFC-J6710DW)
To prevent injuries when moving or lifting this machine, make sure to use at least two people.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you set the machine back down.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
IMPORTANT
• Disruption of power can wipe out information in the machine's memory.
• DO NOT put objects on top of the machine.
• DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place anything in the path of received faxes.
• If the machine does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed, adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage or minor exposure to electromagnetic waves and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the machine to normal operation.
• A distinct change in the machine’s performance may, indicate a need for service.
• The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 16.5 feet (5 meters).
DO NOT connect your machine to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances or other equipment that requires a significant amount of electricity to operate. Doing this may cause an overvoltage, tripping your circuit breaker or blowing your fuse. If you cannot avoid using the machine with these appliances, we recommend that you use a voltage transformer or a high-frequency noise filter. Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not stable.
• Lightning and power surges can damage this machine. We recommend that you use a quality surge protection device on the AC power line and any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45) cable plugged into the machine, or that you unplug the cords during a lightning storm.
Important safety instructions
1 DO NOT attempt to service this machine yourself because opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and may void your warranty. Refer all servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the location of your nearest Brother
Authorized Service Center, please call:
In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER
2 Unplug this machine from the power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized Service
Personnel under the following conditions:
When the power cord is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
1
8
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Regulation
WARNING
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:
• DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
1
To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people;
• Use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of an emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off the power completely.
Standard telephone and FCC notices
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.
When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,
USOC RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA.
A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
1
9
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers in the Basic User’s Guide.) If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.
If you are not able to solve a problem with your machine, call Brother Customer Service.
(See Brother numbers in the Basic User’s Guide.)
WARNING
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.
IMPORTANT
• This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or connected to party lines.
• Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no warranties extended or granted by this document.
• This machine has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA only.
10
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of
Conformity (USA only)
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
TEL: (908) 704-1700 declares, that the products
Product Name: MFC-J6510DW and MFC-J6710DW comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
IMPORTANT
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital device.
1
11
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB–003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
1
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only)
NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
Le présent materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
1
For use in the USA or Canada only
These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the power available in foreign countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and may void your warranty.
1
LAN connection
1
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.
12
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
International ENERGY STAR
®
Qualification Statement
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR
®
Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR
®
Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR
®
specifications for energy efficiency.
1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
13
Trademarks
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC is a registered trademarks of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.
Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo, Memory Stick Duo, MagicGate,
MagicGate Memory Stick, Memory Stick Micro and M2 are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi Protected Access and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
FaceFilter Studio is a trademark of Reallusion, Inc.
BRAdmin Professional is a trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
CorelDraw, Corel Paint Shop Pro and Corel WordPerfect are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the United States and/or other countries.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License
Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
1
14
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Open Source Licensing Remarks
This product includes open-source software.
Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.
(For Windows
®
) “X:\\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).
(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities icon. License.rtf will appear.
1
Legal limitations for copying
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil liability. The listing below is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every possible prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you consult with the appropriate authority or advisor with regard to the specific document.
The following documents issued by the United States/Canadian Government or any of its
Agencies, States, Territories or Provinces may not be copied:
Money
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
Certificates of Deposit
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Selective Service or draft papers
Passports
United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
Food Stamps
Immigration Papers
Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
Identifying badges or insignias
Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles, under certain State/Provincial law
Coping copyrighted works may be regulated by Federal, State of local laws. For more information, consult an appropriate authority or advisor.
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.
1
15
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
BASIC USER’S GUIDE
MFC-J6910DW
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Version 0
USA/CAN
If you need to call Customer Service
Please complete the following information for future reference:
Model Number: MFC-J6910DW
Serial Number:
Date of Purchase:
Place of Purchase:
1
The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain this User's Guide with your sales receipt as a permanent record of your purchase, in the event of theft, fire or warranty service.
Register your product on-line at
http://www.brother.com/registration/
By registering your product with Brother, you will be recorded as the original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;
may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,
will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.
The most convenient and efficient way to register your new product is on-line at http://www.brother.com/registration/.
© 2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Brother numbers
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from within that country.
Register your product
By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:
may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;
may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,
will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.
Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration And Test Sheet or, for your convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at
http://www.brother.com/registration/
FAQs (frequently asked questions)
The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function
Center needs. You can download the latest software documents and utilities, read FAQs and troubleshooting tips, and learn how to get the most from your Brother product.
http://solutions.brother.com/
Note
• You can check here for Brother driver updates.
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade.
For Customer Service
In USA:
In Canada:
1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)
1-901-379-1215 (fax)
1-877-BROTHER
(514) 685-4898 (fax)
Service Center Locator (USA only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).
Service Center Locations (Canada only)
For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.
i
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ordering accessories and supplies
For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, or American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit us online for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for purchase.)
Note
In Canada only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.
In USA:
In Canada:
1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)
1-800-947-1445 (fax)
http://www.brothermall.com/
1-877-BROTHER
http://www.brother.ca/
1
Description
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <black>
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <yellow>
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <cyan> (blue)
Ink Cartridge Super High Yield <magenta> (red)
Ink Cartridge High Yield <black>
Ink Cartridge High Yield <yellow>
Ink Cartridge High Yield <cyan> (blue)
Ink Cartridge High Yield <magenta> (red)
Premium Plus Glossy Photo Paper
(Ledger size / 20 sheets)
(Letter size / 20 sheets)
(4"
6" size / 20 sheets)
Premium Glossy Photo Paper
(Letter size / 20 sheets)
(4"
6" / 20 sheets)
Item
LC79BK (Prints approx. 2,400 pages)
LC79Y (Prints approx. 1,200 pages)
LC75Y (Prints approx. 600 pages)
LC75C (Prints approx. 600 pages)
LC75M (Prints approx. 600 pages)
BP71GLGR
BP71GLTR
BP71GP
BP61GLL (USA only)
BP61GLP (USA only)
LC79C (Prints approx. 1,200 pages)
LC79M (Prints approx. 1,200 pages)
LC75BK (Prints approx. 600 pages)
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us at http://www.brother.com/pageyield/.
ii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Description
Multipurpose Paper - Plain Paper
(Letter size / 500 sheets)
Matte Inkjet Paper
(Letter size / 25 sheets)
Plain Inkjet Paper
(Ledger size / 100 sheets)
(Letter size / 100 sheets)
Telephone Line Cord
Basic User's Guide
Item
BP60MPLTR (USA only)
BP60ML (USA only)
BP60PLGR (USA only)
BP60PL100 (USA only)
LG3077001 (USA only)
LX7947001 (English for USA and Canada)
LX7947002 (French for Canada)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
iii
Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties
(USA and Canada)
BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS
(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER'S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER'S
LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF
ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS
ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY
SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER'S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER'S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER'S LICENSOR'S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT
LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.
iv
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Compilation and Publication Notice
Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
v
User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?
Safety and Legal
Quick Setup Guide
Basic User's Guide
Advanced User's Guide
Software User's Guide
Network Glossary
Network User's Guide
What's in it?
Read this Guide first. Please read the Safety
Instructions before you set up your machine.
See this Guide for trademarks and legal limitations.
Follow the instructions for setting up your machine and installing the drivers and software for the operating system and connection type you are using.
Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
PhotoCapture Center™ operations and how to replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.
Learn more advanced operations: Fax, Copy, security features, printing reports and performing routine maintenance.
Follow these instructions for Printing, Scanning,
Network Scanning, PhotoCapture Center™,
Remote Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.
This Guide provides basic information about advanced network features of Brother machines along with explanations about general networking and common terms.
This Guide provides useful information about wired and wireless network settings and security settings using the Brother machine.
You can also find supported protocol information for your machine and detailed troubleshooting tips.
Where is it?
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
vi
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Table of Contents
(BASIC USER’S GUIDE)
1
2
3
4
General information 1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation ....................................1
Accessing the Advanced User’s Guide, Software User’s Guide,
Network User’s Guide, and Network Glossary ...................................................2
Accessing Brother Support (Windows
)................................................................4
Loading paper 10
Loading paper in the manual feed slot ..........................................................17
Loading envelopes and postcards.................................................................19
Secure Paper Feed mode for Ledger size Short Grain Paper.......................23
Loading documents 28
Sending a fax 31
vii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
6
7
8
Receiving a fax 35
Choose the correct Receive Mode ................................................................35
F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)...............................................................38
Telephone services and external devices 42
Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)................................45
Recording an outgoing message (OGM) on an external TAD.......................46
Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................47
Using external and extension telephones......................................................47
Using a non-Brother cordless external telephone .........................................48
Dialing and storing numbers 49
Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................50
Changing One Touch or Speed Dial names or numbers...............................52
Making copies 54
viii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9 PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive 57
Using a memory card or USB Flash memory drive .......................................57
How to scan to a memory card or USB Flash memory drive............................... 61
10 How to print from a computer 63
11 How to scan to a computer 64
A
B
Routine maintenance 65
Troubleshooting 71
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report ............................................... 79
If you are having difficulty with your machine ................................................ 88
ix
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
C
D
E
Menu and features 100
Specifications 131
Index 145
x
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Table of Contents
(ADVANCED USER’S GUIDE)
The Advanced User's Guide explains the following features and operations.
You can view the Advanced User's Guide on the Documentation CD-ROM.
1 General setup
Memory storage
Volume Settings
Automatic Daylight Saving Time
Sleep Mode
LCD screen
Dial Prefix
Mode Timer
2 Security features
Secure Function Lock 2.0
8 PhotoCapture Center™:
Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™ operations
Print Images
PhotoCapture Center™ print settings
Scan to a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
3 Sending a fax
Additional sending options
Additional sending operations
Polling overview
4 Receiving a fax
Memory Receive (Black & White only)
Remote Retrieval
Additional receiving operations
Polling overview
5 Dialing and storing numbers
Voice operations
Additional dialing operations
Additional ways to store numbers
6 Printing reports
Fax reports
Reports
7 Making copies
Copy settings
9 Printing photos from a camera
Printing photos directly from a
PictBridge camera
Printing photos directly from a digital camera (without PictBridge)
A Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine
Packing and shipping the machine
B Glossary
C Index
xi
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
xii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
General information
Using the documentation
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!
Reading the documentation will help you make the most of your machine.
1
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation
The following symbols and conventions are used throughout the documentation.
1
Bold
Italics
Courier
New
Bold typeface identifies specific keys on the machine’s control panel or on the computer screen.
Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Text in Courier New font identifies messages on the
LCD of the machine.
1
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the operation works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
1
1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 1
Accessing the
Advanced User’s
Guide, Software User’s
Guide, Network User’s
Guide, and Network
Glossary
1
This Basic User’s Guide does not contain all the information about the machine, such as how to use the advanced features for Fax,
Copy, PhotoCapture Center™, Printer,
Scanner, PC-Fax, and Network. When you are ready to learn detailed information about these operations, read the
Advanced User’s Guide,
Software User’s Guide,
Network User’s Guide, and
Network Glossary that are on the
Documentation CD-ROM.
Viewing Documentation
a
Turn on your computer. Insert the
Documentation CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive. For Windows
®
users, go
Note
(Windows
®
users)
If the screen does not appear automatically, go to
My Computer (Computer), double-click the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click
index.html.
b
(Macintosh users)
Double-click the Documentation
CD-ROM icon, and then double-click
index.html.
1
c
Click your country.
d
Point to your language, point to
View Guide, and then click the guide you want to read.
2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Note
• (Windows
®
users only)
Your Web browser may display a yellow bar at the top of the page that contains a security warning about Active X controls.
For the page to display correctly you must click on the bar, click
Allow Blocked Content, then click Yes in the Security Warning dialog box.
• (Windows
®
For faster access, you can copy all user documentation in PDF format to a local folder on your computer. Point to your language, then click Copy to local disk.
1
Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
6.0 or greater.
How to find Scanning instructions
There are several ways you can scan documents. You can find the instructions as follows:
Software User’s Guide
Scanning
ControlCenter
Network Scanning
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR
How-to-Guides
(Windows
®
users)
The complete ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE with OCR How-to-
Guides can be viewed from the Help selection in the ScanSoft™
PaperPort™12SE application.
(Windows
®
2000 users need to download and install PaperPort™11SE from the
Web site.)
1
General information
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide
(Macintosh users)
Note
Presto! PageManager is available as a download from http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/ brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The complete Presto! PageManager
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help selection in the Presto! PageManager application.
How to find Network setup instructions
Your machine can be connected to a wireless or wired network. You can find basic setup instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your wireless access point or router supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup or AOSS™, you can also follow the steps in the Quick Setup Guide. For more information about network setup, please see the Network User's Guide on the
Documentation CD-ROM.
1
1
3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 1
Accessing Brother
Support (Windows
®
)
You can find all the contacts you will need, such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center), Customer Service and Brother
Authorized Service Centers in Brother
numbers on page i and on the Installation
CD-ROM.
Click Brother Support on the Top Menu.
The following screen will appear:
1
To visit our Web site for genuine Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click Supplies Information.
To access the Brother CreativeCenter
(http://www.brother.com/creativecenter/) for FREE photo projects and printable downloads, click Brother CreativeCenter.
To return to the Top Menu, click Back or if you are finished, click Exit.
To access our Web site
(http://www.brother.com/), click
Brother Home Page.
To view all Brother Numbers, including
Customer Service numbers for the USA and Canada, click Support Information.
To access the USA Brother online shopping mall
(http://www.brothermall.com/) for additional product and services information, click Brother Mall.com.
To access Canada’s Brother online shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca/) for additional product and services information, click Shop Online (Canada).
For the latest news and product support information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Accessing Brother
Support (Macintosh)
You can find all the contacts you will need, such as Web support (Brother Solutions
Center) on the Installation CD-ROM.
Double-click the Brother Support icon.
The following screen will appear:
1
General information
1
To download and install Presto!
PageManager, click
Presto! PageManager.
To register your machine from the Brother
Product Register Page
(http://www.brother.com/registration/), click On-Line Registration.
For the latest news and product support information
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click
Brother Solutions Center.
To visit our Web site for genuine Brother
Supplies
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click
Supplies Information.
5
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 1
Control panel overview
9 8
7
1
1
1 Fax and Copy keys:
Duplex
Press this key to copy, scan or fax both sides of the paper.
N in 1 Copy
Press this key to make N in 1 or Poster copies.
Fax Preview
Lets you preview incoming faxes on the
LCD.
Tray Setting
Press this key to choose the tray you want to use for printing.
2 Mode keys:
FAX
Lets you access FAX mode.
SCAN
Lets you access SCAN mode.
COPY
Lets you access COPY mode.
PHOTO CAPTURE
Lets you access PHOTO CAPTURE mode.
2
3 Dial Pad
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax numbers and as a keyboard for entering information into the machine.
This function transfers to the touchscreen when you store quick dial numbers.
(Canada only) The # key lets you temporarily switch the dialing mode during a telephone call from Pulse to Tone.
4 Telephone keys:
Redial/Pause
Redials the last 30 numbers called. It also inserts a pause when dialing numbers.
Hook
Press before dialing when you want to listen to make sure a fax machine has answered, and then press Black Start or
Color Start.
Also, press this key after picking up the handset of the external telephone during the F/T pseudo/double-ring.
6
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
General information
6
1
5 Start keys:
Black Start
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies in black & white. Also lets you start a scanning operation (in color or black & white depending on the scan setting in the
ControlCenter software).
Color Start
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies in full color. Also lets you start a scanning operation (in color or black & white, depending on the scan setting in the
ControlCenter software).
6 Stop/Exit
Stops an operation or exits the menu.
7 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
This is a Touchscreen LCD. You can access the menus and options by pressing buttons displayed on the screen.
Also, you can adjust the angle of the LCD screen by lifting it.
3 4 5
8 One Touch keys
These 8 keys give you instant access to 16 previously stored numbers.
Shift
To access One Touch numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as you press the One Touch key.
9 On/Off
You can turn the machine on and off.
Press On/Off to turn the machine on.
Press and hold down On/Off to turn the machine off. The LCD will show
Shutting Down and will stay on for a few seconds before going off.
If you have connected an external telephone or
TAD, it is always available.
If you turn the machine off, it will still periodically clean the print head to maintain print quality. To prolong print head life, provide the best ink cartridge economy, and maintain print quality, you should keep your machine connected to the power at all times.
7
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 1
LCD Touchscreen
The LCD shows the current machine status when the machine is idle.
10
9 8 7
1
1 2 3 4
1 Faxes in memory
Shows how many received faxes are in the memory.
2 Fax Preview
Lets you preview received faxes.
3 MENU
Lets you access the main menu.
4 Ink indicator
Lets you see the available ink volume.
Also, lets you access the Ink menu.
5 Current Receive Mode
Lets you see the current Receive Mode.
Fax (Fax Only)
F/T (Fax/Tel)
TAD (External TAD)
Mnl (Manual)
Note
When the Distinctive Ring feature is turned on, the LCD shows D/R. For details, see
6 Memory Status
Lets you see the available memory in the machine.
7 Phone Book
Lets you set up your phone book of
One Touch, Speed Dial and Group numbers.
Also, you can search the phone book for the number you want to dial.
8
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6
5
8 Wireless Status
A four-level indicator shows the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless connection.
0
9 Call History
Max
Lets you view a list of outgoing calls and the
Caller ID history.
Also, lets you fax the number you have chosen from the lists.
10 New Fax
When Fax Preview is set to On, you can see how many new faxes you have received.
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message.
For details, see Error and Maintenance
Note
If you receive a fax containing multiple paper sizes (for example, a Letter size page and a Ledger size page), the machine may create and store a file for each paper size. The LCD may show that more than one fax job has been received.
General information
Basic Operations
To operate the Touchscreen use your finger to press the MENU or option button directly on the Touchscreen. To display and access all the screen menus or options in a setting, press d c or a b to scroll through them.
1
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the Touchscreen with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
The following steps show how to change a setting in the machine. In this example the
Receive Mode setting is changed from
Fax Only to Fax/Tel.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
f
Press Fax/Tel.
Note
Press level.
to go back to the previous g
Press Stop/Exit.
1
c
Press Initial Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Receive Mode.
e
Press Receive Mode.
9
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2
Loading paper
Loading paper and other print media
Note
For Tray #2, see Loading paper in paper
Loading paper in paper tray #1
2
a
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2
Note
• When you are using Legal, Ledger or A3 size paper, press the universal guide release button (1) as you slide out the front of the paper tray. Make sure that when using Legal or Ledger or A3 size paper, the triangular mark on the output paper tray cover is aligned with the line indicating Legal (2) or Ledger or A3 (3) size, as shown in the illustration.
2
3
2
1
Note
If the paper support flap (1) is open, close it, and then close the paper support (2).
1
2
• If you are using A5 or smaller size paper, make sure that the paper tray is not extended.
• When you load a different paper size in a tray, you will need to change the paper size setting in the machine at the same
time. (See Paper Size and Type on page 22.)
10
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b
Open the output paper tray cover (1).
Loading paper d
Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.
1
2
c
With both hands, gently press and slide the paper length guide (1) and then the paper side guides (2) to fit the paper size.
Make sure that the triangular marks (3) on the paper length guide (1) and paper side guides (2) line up with the mark for the paper size you are using.
Note
Always make sure that the paper is not curled.
e
Gently put the paper into the paper tray print side down and top edge in first.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray.
2
3
1
11
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2
Note
When you put Photo L size into the paper tray, you need to release the hinges on both sides of the output paper tray cover, and push the cover over. And then slide the paper length guide.
g
Close the output paper tray cover.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray and below the maximum paper mark (1).
Overfilling the paper tray may cause paper jams.
1 h
Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
f
Gently adjust the paper side guides to fit the paper with both hands.
Make sure the paper side guides touch the sides of the paper.
WARNING
DO NOT push Tray #1 into the machine too quickly. Doing this may cause injury to your hand by trapping it between Tray #1 and
Tray #2. Please push Tray #1 in slowly.
Note
Be careful not to push the paper in too far; it may lift at the back of the tray and cause feed problems.
12
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
i
While holding the paper tray in place, pull out the paper support (1) until it clicks, and then unfold the paper support flap (2).
2
1
Note
Before you shorten Tray #1, take the paper out of the tray. Then shorten the tray by pressing the universal guide release button (1). Adjust the paper length guide (2) to fit the paper size you are going to use. Then put the paper in the tray.
Loading paper
Loading paper in paper tray #2
2
Note
• You can only use plain paper sizes
Ledger, Letter, Legal, Executive, A3 or A4 in Tray #2.
• When you use the Borderless printing feature paper must be fed from Tray #1.
a
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2
Note
• If you are using Ledger, Legal or A3 size paper, press the universal guide release button (1) as you slide out the front of the paper tray until it clicks.
• You can check if the length of the tray is adjusted properly by opening the paper tray cover.
1
1
2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
13
Chapter 2 b
Open the paper tray cover (1).
1 c
Using both hands, gently press and slide the paper length guide (1) and then the paper side guides (2) to fit the paper size.
Make sure that the triangular marks (3) on the paper length guide (1) and paper side guides (2) line up with the marks for the paper size you are using.
d
Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.
Note
Always make sure that the paper is not curled.
e
Gently put the paper into the paper tray print side down and top edge in first.
Check that the paper is flat in the tray and below the maximum paper mark (1).
Overfilling the paper tray may cause paper jams.
1
2
3 f
Using both hands, gently adjust the paper side guides so they touch the sides of the paper stack.
1
14
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Note
Be careful not to push the paper in too far; it may lift at the back of the tray and cause feed problems.
g
Close the paper tray cover.
Loading paper j
Pull tray #1 out of the machine.
Press the universal guide release button (1) as you slide out the front of the paper tray.
2
h
Slowly push the paper tray back into the machine.
1 i
Do one of the following:
If you are using Ledger, Legal or A3
Note
When you are using large size paper in
Tray #2, you may need to extend Tray #1 out over Tray #2 to prevent printed pages from falling off the output tray.
If you are using Letter, Executive or
k
Open the output paper tray cover and adjust the paper length guide (1) for the paper.
1
15
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2 l
Close the output paper tray cover and
slowly push the paper tray into the machine.
Note
If you are finished using Ledger, Legal or
A3 size paper and want to use a smaller paper size, take the paper out of the tray.
Then shorten the tray by pressing the universal guide release button (1). Adjust the paper length guide (2) to fit the paper size you are going to use. Then put the smaller paper into the tray.
m
Pull out the paper support (1) until it clicks and unfold the paper support flap (2).
2
1
1
2
16
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading paper in the manual feed slot
2
You can load special print media one at a time into this slot. Use the manual feed slot to print or copy on envelopes, labels or thicker paper.
Note
• The machine automatically turns on the
Manual Feed mode when you put paper in the manual feed slot.
• When you use the Borderless printing feature paper must be fed from Tray #1.
a
Open the manual feed slot cover.
b
Slide the manual feed slot paper guides
Loading paper to the width of the paper that you are going to use.
c
Put only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot with the side to be printed face up.
2
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT put more than one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot at any one time.
Doing this may cause a paper jam. Wait until the LCD shows
Put paper in Manual Feed Slot
Then Press Start before you feed the next sheet of paper in the manual feed slot.
• DO NOT put paper in the manual feed slot when you are printing from Tray #1 or
Tray #2. Doing this may cause a paper jam.
17
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2 d
Using both hands gently adjust the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the paper.
Note
• DO NOT press the paper guides too tightly against the paper. Doing this may cause the paper to fold.
• Place the paper in the center of the manual feed slot between the paper guides. If the paper is not centered, pull it out and insert it again at the center position.
e
Using both hands, put one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper feed roller and the machine beeps. Let go of the paper when you feel the machine feed the paper in a short distance. The LCD will show
Manual Feed Slot ready.
Note
When loading an envelope, or a sheet of thick paper, push the envelope into the manual feed slot until you feel it grab the envelope.
f
If the data does not fit on one page, the
LCD will prompt you to load another page. Place another sheet of paper in the manual feed slot, and then press
Black Start or Color Start.
Note
• Make sure printing has finished before you close the manual feed slot.
• When paper is placed in the manual feed slot, the machine always prints from the manual feed slot.
• Paper inserted in the manual feed slot while a test page, fax or report is being printed will be ejected.
• During the machine's cleaning process, paper you place in the manual feed slot will be ejected. Wait until the machine finishes its cleaning, and then put the paper into the manual feed slot again.
18
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading envelopes and postcards
About envelopes
Use envelopes that weigh from 20 to 25 lb
(80 to 95 g/m
2
).
Some envelopes need margin settings to be set in the application. Make sure you do a test print first before printing many envelopes.
2
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any of the following types of envelopes, as they will cause paper feed problems:
• That are of a baggy construction.
• That have windows.
• That are embossed (have raised writing on them).
• That have clasps or staples.
• That are pre-printed on the inside.
Glue Double flaps
2
Loading paper
Loading envelopes and postcards
a
Before loading, press the corners and sides of envelopes or postcards to make them as flat as possible.
2
IMPORTANT
If envelopes or postcards are “doublefeeding,” put one envelope or postcard in the paper tray at a time.
2
Occasionally you may experience paper feed problems caused by the thickness, size and flap shape of the envelopes you are using.
19
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2 b
Put envelopes or postcards in the paper tray with the address side down and the leading edge in first as shown in the illustration. Using both hands, gently press and slide the paper length guide (1) and paper side guides (2) to fit the size of the envelopes or postcards.
If you have problems when printing on envelopes, try the following suggestions:
2
a
Open the envelope flap.
b
Make sure the open flap is to the back edge of the envelope when printing.
2 c
Adjust the size and margin in your application.
1
20
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading paper
Printable area
The printable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below show the unprintable areas on cut-sheet paper and envelopes. The machine can print in the shaded areas of cut-sheet paper only when the Borderless print feature is available and turned on. (See Printing for Windows
®
or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s
Guide.)
2
2
Cut-Sheet Paper
3
1
4
Envelopes
1
3 4
2
2
Cut-Sheet
Top (1)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Bottom (2)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Left (3)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Right (4)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
Cut-Sheet (Duplex print when using Ledger or
A3 size)
Envelopes
0.87 in. (22 mm) 0.87 in. (22 mm) 0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.87 in. (22 mm)
0.87 in. (22 mm) 0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.12 in. (3 mm)
1
The top margin of Y4 envelopes is 0.47 in. (12 mm).
Note
• The Borderless feature is not available for envelopes and duplex printing.
• When you use the Borderless printing feature paper must be fed from Tray #1.
21
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2
Paper settings
Paper Size and Type
To get the best print quality, set the machine for the type of paper you are using.
You can use eight sizes of paper for printing copies: Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4, A5, A3,
Executive and 4
6 in. (10 15 cm) and five sizes for printing faxes: Ledger, Letter, Legal,
A3 or A4. When you load a different size of paper in the machine, you will need to change the paper size setting at the same time so your machine can fit an incoming fax on the page.
a
Press Tray Setting.
b
Press the displayed paper size or paper type for Tray#1, or press the displayed paper size for Tray#2.
c
Do one of the following:
If you chose the paper size for
Tray#1, press d or c to display the paper size options, and press
Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4, A5,
A3, EXE or 4"x6".
If you chose the paper type for
Tray#1, press Plain Paper,
Inkjet Paper, Brother BP71,
Brother BP61, Other Glossy or Transparency.
If you chose Tray#2, press Letter,
Legal, Ledger, A4, A3 or EXE.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• You can only use plain paper in Tray#2.
• The machine ejects paper with the printed surface face up onto the paper tray in the front of the machine. When you use transparencies or glossy paper, remove each sheet at once to prevent smudging or paper jams.
2
2
22
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tray use in COPY mode
You can change the default tray the machine will use for copies.
Auto Select will allow your machine to feed paper from either Tray #1 or Tray #2, using the paper type and size settings from the COPY key menu.
To change the default setting, follow the instructions below: a
Press Tray Setting.
b
Press a or b on the Touchscreen to display Tray Use:Copy.
c
Press Tray Use:Copy.
d
Press Tray#1, Tray#2 or
Auto Select.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can temporarily change the paper size and tray selection for the next copy by
using the COPY mode key. (See Paper
Size on page 55 and Tray Select on page 56.)
2
Tray use in FAX mode
You can change the default tray the machine will use for printing received faxes.
Auto Select will allow your machine to take paper from Tray #1 first, or from Tray #2 if:
Tray #2 is set to a different paper size that is more suitable for the received faxes.
Both trays are using the same size paper and Tray #1 is not set to use plain paper.
a
Press Tray Setting.
b
Press a or b on the Touchscreen to display Tray Use:Fax.
c
Press Tray Use:Fax.
d
Press Tray#1, Tray#2 or
Auto Select.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
2
Loading paper
Secure Paper Feed mode for
Ledger size Short Grain Paper
2
If your printed pages are smudged when using Ledger paper, your paper may be short grain paper. Choose LGR - Short Grain and set it to On to avoid this problem.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display
LGR - Short Grain.
e
Press LGR - Short Grain.
f
Press On.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• If you are not sure about the type of paper you are using, consult the paper packaging or paper manufacturer for paper specifications.
• Printing will be slower when using the
LGR - Short Grain setting.
2
23
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2
Acceptable paper and other print media
2
The print quality can be affected by the type of paper you use in the machine.
To get the best print quality for the settings you have chosen, always set the Paper Type to match the type of paper you load.
You can use plain paper, inkjet paper (coated paper), glossy paper, transparencies and envelopes.
We recommend testing various paper types before buying large quantities.
For best results, use Brother paper.
When you print on inkjet paper (coated paper), transparencies and glossy paper, be sure to choose the proper print media in the Basic tab of the printer driver or in the Paper Type setting of the machine’s
menu. (See Paper Size and Type on page 22.)
When you print on Brother Photo paper, load one extra sheet of the same photo paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has been included in the paper package for this purpose.
When you use transparencies or photo paper, remove each sheet at once to prevent smudging or paper jams.
Avoid touching the printed surface of the paper immediately after printing; the surface may not be completely dry and may stain your fingers.
Recommended print media
To get the best print quality, we suggest using
Brother paper. (See the table below.)
We recommend using “3M Transparency
Film” when you print on transparencies.
2
Brother paper
Paper Type
Premium Plus Glossy
Photo
Ledger
Letter
4"
6"
Premium Glossy Photo
Letter
4"
6"
Matte Inkjet (Letter)
Plain Inkjet
Ledger
Letter
Item
BP71GLGR
BP71GLTR
BP71GP
BP61GLL (USA only)
BP61GLP (USA only)
BP60ML (USA only)
BP60PLGR (USA only)
BP60PL100 (USA only)
24
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling and using print media
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct sunlight and heat.
Avoid touching the shiny (coated) side of photo paper. Load photo paper with the shiny side facing down.
Avoid touching either side of transparencies because they absorb water and perspiration easily, and this may cause decreased output quality.
Transparencies designed for laser printers/copiers may stain your next document. Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use the following kinds of paper:
• Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped
2
1
1
1 0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater curl may cause jams to occur.
• Extremely shiny or highly textured
• Paper that cannot be arranged uniformly when stacked
• Paper made with a short grain
Loading paper
Labels
Labels should be arranged so that they cover the entire length and width of the sheet. Using labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jams or print problems.
2
Types of labels to avoid
Do not use labels that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or an unusual shape.
2
2
IMPORTANT
• Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet exposed because your machine will be damaged.
• DO NOT reuse or insert labels that have previously been used or are missing few labels on the sheet.
Paper capacity of the output paper tray cover
Up to 50 sheets of Letter, Legal or A4 20 lb
(80 g/m
2
) paper.
Transparencies and photo paper must be picked up from the output paper tray cover one page at a time to avoid smudging.
2
25
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2
Choosing the right print media
Paper type and size for each operation
Paper Type
Cut-Sheet
Cards
Labels
Paper Size
Ledger
A3
A4
Legal
Executive
JIS B4
JIS B5
A5
A6
Photo
Photo L
Photo 2L
Index Card
Postcard 1
Postcard 2
(Double)
Legal
A5
11
8.3
7.2
5.8
4.1
4
5
5
3.9
5.8
17 in. (279.4 431.8 mm)
11.7
16.5 in. (297 420 mm)
11.7 in. (210 297 mm)
Usage
Fax
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 1/2
14 in. (215.9 355.6 mm) Yes
7 1/4
10 1/2 in. (184 267 mm) –
10.1
10.1 in. (182 257 mm)
8.3 in. (148 210 mm)
5.8 in. (105 148 mm)
6 in. (10 15 cm)
3 1/2
14.3 in. (257 364 mm)
5 in. (89 127 mm)
7 in. (13 18 cm)
8 in. (127 203 mm)
5.8 in. (100 148 mm)
7.9 in. (148 200 mm)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Envelopes C5 Envelope 6.4
9 in. (162 229 mm)
DL Envelope
COM-10
4.3
8.7 in. (110 220 mm)
–
–
4 1/8
9 1/2 in. (105 241 mm) –
Monarch 3 7/8
7 1/2 in. (98 191 mm)
–
Y4 Envelope 4.1
9.3 in. (105 235 mm)
–
Transparencies Letter
A4
8 1/2
11 in. (215.9 279.4 mm) –
8.3
11.7 in. (210 297 mm)
–
8 1/2
14 in. (215.9 355.6 mm) –
5.8
8.3 in. (148 210 mm)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Copy Photo
Capture
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
–
–
–
Printer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User
Defined
User
Defined
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User
Defined
User
Defined
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User
Defined
1
Manual Feed Slot only
2
2
26
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading paper
Paper capacity of the paper trays
2
Paper size
1
Tray #1
Tray #2
Manual Feed Slot
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal,
Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4,
JIS B5, Envelopes (commercial
No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4),
Photo, Photo L, Photo 2L, Index
Card, Postcard 1, Postcard 2
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal,
Executive, A4, JIS B4, JIS B5
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal,
Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4,
JIS B5, Envelopes (commercial
No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4),
Photo, Photo L, Photo 2L, Index
Card, Postcard 1, Postcard 2
Up to 250 sheets of plain paper 20 lb (80 g/m
2
).
Paper types No. of sheets
Plain Paper
Inkjet Paper
Glossy Paper, Photo
Index Card, Postcard 30
Envelopes, Transparencies 10
20
20
Plain Paper
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Glossy Paper, Envelopes,
Transparencies and Labels
1
Paper weight and thickness
2
2
Paper Type
Cut-Sheet
Cards
Plain Paper
(Tray #2)
Plain Paper
Inkjet Paper
Photo 4"
Index Card
Postcard 1
Postcard 2
Weight
17 to 32 lb (64 to 120 g/m
2
17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m
17 to 53 lb (64 to 200 g/m
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m
Up to 58 lb (Up to 220 g/m
2
2
2
2
Up to 32 lb (Up to 120 g/m
2
Up to 53 lb (Up to 200 g/m
2
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Thickness
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)
3 to 10 mil (0.08 to 0.25 mm)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
Up to 6 mil (Up to 0.15 mm)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
1
Envelopes
Transparencies
Labels
20 to 25 lb (75 to 95 g/m
2
)
–
–
BP71 69 lb (260 g/m
2
) paper is especially designed for Brother inkjet machines.
Up to 20 mil (Up to 0.52 mm)
–
–
27
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Loading documents
How to load documents
You can send a fax, make copies, and scan from the ADF (automatic document feeder) and from the scanner glass.
Duplex (2-sided) documents can be faxed, copied, or scanned up to Legal size using the
ADF.
3
Using the ADF
The ADF can hold up to 35 pages and feeds each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb
(80 g/m
2
) paper and always fan the pages before putting them in the ADF.
3
Document Sizes Supported
Recommended Paper: 20 lb LTR (80 g/m
2
A4)
3
Length:
Width:
Weight:
5.8 to 17 in.
(148 to 431.8 mm)
5.8 to 11.7 in.
(148 to 297 mm)
17 to 24 lb
(64 to 90 g/m
2
)
How to load documents
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper clipped, pasted or taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric.
3
Make sure documents with ink or correction fluid are completely dry.
a
Unfold the ADF Document Support (1) and the ADF Document Output Support
Flap (2).
1
2 b
Fan the pages well.
c
Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the width of your document.
3
1
28
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d
Place your document, face up, top
edge first in the ADF until the LCD shows ADF Ready and you feel it touch the feed rollers.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT leave a thick document on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.
Using the scanner glass
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or scan pages of a book or one page at a time.
3
Document Sizes Supported
3
Loading documents
How to load documents
Note
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.
a
Lift the document cover.
b
Using the document guidelines on the left and top, place the document
face down in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
3
3
Width:
Weight:
Up to 11.7 in. (297 mm)
Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals c
Close the document cover.
IMPORTANT
If you are scanning a book or thick document, DO NOT slam the cover down or press on it.
29
Chapter 3
Unscannable area
The scannable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below show unscannable areas.
3 4
1
3
2
Usage Document
Fax
1
Copy
Scan
Size
Ledger
Letter
Legal
A3
A4
All paper sizes
Top (1)
Bottom (2)
0.12 in.
(3 mm)
Left (3)
Right (4)
0.15 in.
(3.7 mm)
0.16 in.
(4 mm)
0.18 in.
(4.5 mm)
0.12 in.
(3 mm)
0.12 in.
(3 mm)
The unscannable area is 0.04 in (1 mm) when you use the ADF.
30
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
Sending a fax
4
How to send a fax
The following steps show how to send a fax.
a
When the machine is idle, the date and time appear on the LCD. When you want to send a fax, or change fax send or receive settings, press the
(FAX) key to illuminate it in blue.
4
The LCD shows: b
Do one of the following to load your document:
Place the document face up in the
ADF. (See Using the ADF on page 28.)
Load your document face down on
the scanner glass. (See Using the
Note
• To send color faxes with multiple pages use the ADF.
• If you send a black & white fax from the
ADF while the memory is full, it will be sent in real time.
• You can use the scanner glass to fax pages of a book one at a time. The document can be up to Ledger or A3 size.
• Since you can only scan one page at a time, it is easier to use the ADF if you are sending a multiple-page document.
4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
31
Chapter 4 c
You can change the following fax sending settings. Press FAX and then press
d
or c to scroll through the fax settings.
When the setting you want is displayed, press it and choose your option.
(Basic User's Guide)
For details changing the following fax
sending settings, see pages 33 to 34.
Glass ScanSize
Color Fax Transmission
Preview Outgoing Fax
Transmission Verification Report
(Setup)
(Advanced User's Guide)
For more advanced fax sending operations and settings, see Chapter 3
Sending a fax in the Advanced User’s
Guide:
Contrast
Fax Resolution
Set New Defaults
Factory Reset
Duplex fax
Faxing at End of Call
Broadcasting
Real Time TX
Overseas Mode
Delayed Fax
Batch TX
Canceling Waiting Jobs
Polled Transmit d
Enter the fax number.
Using the dial pad
Using the Phone Book
Phone Book
Using call history
Outgoing Call
Caller ID hist.
32
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Note
• You can preview a fax message before sending it by setting Preview to On. (See
How to preview an outgoing fax on page 33.)
• If your network supports the LDAP protocol you can search for fax numbers and E-mail addresses on your server.
(See LDAP operation in the Network
User’s Guide.) e
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Faxing from the ADF
The machine starts scanning and sending the document.
Faxing from the scanner glass
If you pressed Black Start, the machine starts scanning the first
If you pressed Color Start, the LCD asks if you want to send a color fax.
Press Yes to confirm. The machine starts sending the document.
f
When the LCD asks you Next Page?, do one of the following:
To send a single page, press No (or press Black Start again).
The machine starts sending the document.
To send more than one page, press
g
Place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Black Start.
The machine starts scanning the page.
(Repeat steps f and g for each
additional page.)
Stop faxing
To stop faxing, press Stop/Exit.
Setting scanner glass size for faxing
4
When documents are A4 size, you need to set the Scan Size to A4. If you do not, the bottom portion of the faxes will be missing.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display
Glass Scan Size.
c
Press Glass Scan Size.
d
Press Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4 or
A3.
Note
• You can save the setting you use most often by setting it as the default. (See
Setting your changes as the new default in
chapter 3 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
• This setting is only available for sending documents from the scanner glass.
Color fax transmission
4
Your machine can send a color fax to machines that support this feature.
Color faxes cannot be stored in the machine’s memory. When you send a color fax, the machine will send it in real time (even if
Real Time TX is set to Off).
Canceling a fax in progress
If you want to cancel a fax while the machine is scanning, dialing or sending, press
Stop/Exit.
4
4
Sending a fax
How to preview an outgoing fax
4
You can preview a fax message before you send it. You must set Real Time
Transmission and Polling RX to Off before you use this feature.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display Preview.
c
Press Preview.
d
Press On.
e
Load the document.
f
Enter the fax number using the dial pad,
One Touch or Speed Dial.
g
Press Black Start.
The machine starts scanning the document and the outgoing fax appears on the LCD.
When the fax is displayed, press MENU on the Touchscreen and the following buttons will appear. Press the button you want to use to perform an operation.
4
Button
or
or
Description
Enlarge the fax.
Reduce the fax.
Scroll vertically.
Scroll horizontally.
Rotate the fax clockwise.
Go back to the previous page.
Go to the next page.
Close the preview table.
Note
To send a color fax do not use Fax
Preview.
33
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 4 h
Press Black Start.
Note
The fax message in the memory will be sent and then erased when you press
Black Start.
Transmission Verification
Report
4
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the sender’s name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent, and whether or not the transmission was successful.
There are several settings available for the
Transmission Verification Report:
On: Prints a report after every fax you send.
On+Image: Prints a report after every fax you send. A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off: Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
The report will also print if the receiving machine modifies the size of the document you fax, or if you send a color fax that the receiving machine prints in black and white. Off is the default setting.
Off+Image: Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
The report will also print if your fax is successful, but the receiving machine modifies the size of the document you fax, or if you send a color fax that the receiving machine prints in black and white.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off2: Prints a report only if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Off2+Image: Prints a report only if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error. A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
34
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Report Setting.
e
Press Report Setting.
f
Press Transmission.
g
Press On, On+Image, Off,
Off+Image, Off2 or Off2+Image.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• If you choose On+Image, Off+Image or
Off2+Image the image will only appear on the Transmission Verification Report if
Real Time Transmission is set to Off. The image will not appear on the report when you send a color fax. (See Real Time
Transmission in chapter 3 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
• If your transmission is successful, "OK" will appear next to "RESULT" on the
Transmission Verification Report. If transmission is not successful, "NG" will appear next to "RESULT."
5
Receiving a fax
5
Receive Modes
Choose the correct Receive Mode
The correct Receive Mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the
Brother machine.
5
5
Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring” but different telephone companies may have other names for this service, such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,
5
Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.
(See Voice Mail on page 42 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)
Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother
machine?
Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TAD as your Receive Mode.
(See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 45.)
Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?
Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Only as your Receive Mode.
Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?
Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?
The Fax/Tel Receive Mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the
same line. Choose Fax/Tel as your Receive Mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 37.)
Important Note: You cannot receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering machine with the Fax/Tel mode.
Do you expect to receive very few faxes?
Choose Manual as your Receive Mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call
yourself. (See Manual on page 37.)
35
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
To set the Receive Mode follow the instructions below:
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Initial Setup.
c
Press Initial Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Receive Mode.
e
Press Receive Mode.
f
Press Fax Only, Fax/Tel, External TAD or Manual.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
The LCD will display the current Receive Mode.
36
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Using Receive Modes
Some Receive Modes answer automatically
(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to change the Ring Delay before using these
modes. (See Ring Delay on page 38.)
5
Fax Only
Fax Only mode will automatically answer every call as a fax call.
5
Fax/Tel
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically manage incoming calls, by recognizing whether they are fax or voice calls and handling them in one of the following ways:
Faxes will be automatically received.
Voice calls will start the F/T Ring to tell you to pick up the line. The F/T Ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring made by your machine.
(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) on page 38 and Ring Delay on page 38.)
5
Manual
Manual mode turns off all automatic answering functions unless you are using the
Distinctive Ring feature.
To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the handset of the external telephone or press
Hook. When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press Black Start or
Color Start and choose Receive. You can also use the Easy Receive feature to receive faxes by lifting a handset on the same line as the machine.
(Also see Easy Receive on page 39.)
5
Receiving a fax
External TAD
External TAD mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls. Incoming calls will be handled in one of the following ways:
Faxes will be automatically received.
Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.
(For more information see Connecting an
external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 45.)
5
5
37
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Receive Mode settings
5
Ring Delay
The Ring Delay sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in Fax Only or Fax/Tel mode. If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, keep the Ring Delay setting of
4 rings.
(See Using external and extension
telephones on page 47 and Easy Receive on page 39.)
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display Ring Delay.
g
Press Ring Delay.
h
Press the number of times the machine will ring before it answers (0, 1, 2, 3 or
4).
If you choose 0, the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
5
F/T Ring Time
(Fax/Tel mode only)
When somebody calls your machine, you and your caller will hear the normal telephone ring. The number of rings is set by the Ring
Delay setting.
If the call is a fax, then your machine will receive it; however, if it is a voice call the machine will sound the F/T Ring (a fast pseudo/double-ring) for the time you have set in the F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the
F/T Ring it means that you have a voice caller on the line.
Because the F/T Ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can still answer the call on any telephone. (For more information
see Using remote codes on page 48.)
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
F/T Ring Time.
g
Press F/T Ring Time.
h
Press how long the machine will ring to alert you that you have a voice call (20,
30, 40 or 70 seconds).
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set time.
5
38
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Easy Receive
If Easy Receive is On:
The machine can receive a fax automatically, even if you answer the call. When you see
Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the phone line through the handset you are using, just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest.
5
If Easy Receive is Off:
If you are at the machine and answered a call first by lifting the external handset, press
Black Start or Color Start, and then press
Receive to receive.
If you answered at an extension telephone
press l 5 1. (See Using external and
extension telephones on page 47.)
5
Note
• If this feature is set to On, but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension or external telephone, press the fax receive code l 5 1.
• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display Easy Receive.
g
Press Easy Receive.
h
Press On (or Off).
i
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Receiving a fax
Fax Preview
(Black & White only)
5
How to preview a received fax
5
You can view received faxes on the LCD by pressing the Fax Preview key. When the machine is in Ready mode, a popup message will appear on the LCD to alert you of new faxes.
Setting Fax Preview
a
Press Fax Preview.
The LCD will ask you if you want to turn on Fax Preview.
b
Press Yes.
The LCD asks you again to confirm because faxes will be viewed instead of being automatically printed.
Press Yes.
c
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Note
• When Fax Preview is turned on, a backup copy of received faxes will not be printed for Fax Forwarding and PC-Fax Receiving operations, even if you have set Backup
Print to On.
• Fax Preview is not available when Fax
Forwarding is turned on.
5
39
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Using Fax Preview
When you receive a fax, you will see the popup message on the LCD. (For example:
New Fax(es): 02)
5
a
Press Fax Preview.
You can see the new fax list.
Note
• If you receive a fax containing multiple paper sizes (for example, a Letter size page and a Ledger size page), the machine may create and store a file for each paper size. The LCD may show that more than one fax job has been received.
• You can also see your old fax list by pressing the Old Fax tab on the
Touchscreen. Press the New Fax tab to go back to your new fax list.
b
Press a or b to display the fax number of the fax you want to see.
c
Press the fax you want to see.
Note
• If your fax is large there may be a delay before it is displayed on the LCD.
• The LCD will show the current page number and total pages of the fax message. When your fax message is over
99 pages the total number of pages will be shown as "XX."
When the fax is displayed, the following buttons will appear on the LCD and you can perform the operations shown below.
Button
or
or
Description
Enlarge the fax.
Reduce the fax.
Scroll vertically.
Scroll horizontally.
Rotate the fax clockwise.
Delete the fax.
Press Yes to confirm.
Go back to the previous page.
Go to the next page.
Go back to the fax list.
Print the fax.
Do one of the following:
Press Print All Pages to print the whole message.
Press
Print Displayed Only to print only the displayed page.
Press
Print From Displayed to print from the displayed page to the last page.
Close the preview table.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
40
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to print a fax
a
Press Fax Preview.
b
Press the fax you want to view.
c
Press
If the fax is multiple pages, go to
If the fax is a single page it will start
d
Do one of the following:
Press Print All Pages to print all pages of the fax.
Press Print Displayed Only to print the displayed page.
Press Print From Displayed to print the displayed page to the last page.
e
Do one of the following:
To delete the fax, press Yes.
To keep the fax in the memory, press
No.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
How to print all faxes in the list
a
Press Fax Preview.
b
Press More.
c
Press Print All.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
How to delete all faxes in the list
a
Press Fax Preview.
b
Press More.
c
Press Delete All.
Press Yes to confirm.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
5
5
Receiving a fax
Turning off Fax Preview
a
Press Fax Preview.
b
Press More.
c
Press Turn Off Fax Preview.
d
Press Yes to confirm.
e
If there are faxes stored in the memory, do one of the following:
To turn off Fax Preview without printing your stored faxes, press
Continue.
Press Yes to confirm your faxes will be deleted.
If you want to print all the stored faxes, press Print all faxes.
If you do not wish to turn off Fax
Preview, press Cancel. f
Press Stop/Exit.
5
5
41
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6
Telephone services and external devices
6
Telephone services
Your machine supports the Caller ID and
Distinctive Ring subscriber telephone services that some telephone companies offer.
Features like Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call
Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, answering services, alarm systems or other custom features on one telephone line may create problems with the operation of your machine.
If you have Voice Mail on your telephone line, please read the following carefully.
6
Voice Mail
If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.
For example, if your Voice Mail is set to answer after 4 rings and your Brother machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then your Brother machine will answer first. This will prevent callers from being able to leave a message in your Voice Mail.
Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail will answer first. This will prevent your Brother machine from being able to receive an incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother machine.
6
To avoid conflicts between your Brother machine and your Voice Mail service, do one of the following:
Get the Distinctive Ring service from your telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a feature of your Brother machine that allows a person with one line to receive fax and voice calls through two different phone numbers on that one line.
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring,” but telephone companies market the service under a variety of names, such as Custom
Ringing, Personalized Ring, Smart Ring,
RingMaster, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data
Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax
& Alternate Number Ringing. This service establishes a second telephone number on the same line as your existing telephone number, and each number has its own ring pattern. Typically, the original number rings with the standard ring pattern and is used for receiving voice calls, and the second number rings with a different ring pattern and is used
for receiving faxes. (See Distinctive Ring on page 43.)
OR
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to
“Manual.” Manual Mode requires that you answer every incoming call if you want to be able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a telephone call, then complete the call as you normally would. If you hear fax-sending tones you must transfer the call to the Brother
machine. (See Using external and extension
telephones on page 47.) Unanswered fax
and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see
Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
42
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Distinctive Ring
Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother machine that allows a person with one line to receive fax and voice calls through two different phone numbers on that one line.
Brother uses the term “Distinctive Ring,” but telephone companies market the service under a variety of names, such as Smart
Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This service establishes a second telephone number on the same line as your existing telephone number, and each number has its own ring pattern. Typically, the original number rings with the standard ring pattern and is used for receiving voice calls, and the second number rings with a different ring pattern and is used for receiving faxes.
Note
• You must pay for your telephone company's Distinctive Ring service before you program the machine to work with it.
• Please call your telephone company for availability and rates.
What does your telephone company's
“Distinctive Ring” do?
6
Your telephone company's Distinctive Ring service allows you to have more than one number on the same telephone line. If you
need more than one telephone number, it
is cheaper than paying for an extra line.
Each telephone number has its own distinctive ring pattern, so you will know which telephone number is ringing. This is one way you can have a separate telephone number for your machine.
6
What does Brother's “Distinctive
Ring” do?
The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring feature that allows you to use your machine to take full advantage of the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service. The new telephone number on your line can just receive faxes.
6
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Telephone services and external devices
Do you have Voice Mail?
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line that you will install your new machine on,
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail and the machine will conflict with each other
while receiving incoming calls. However, the
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use more than one number on your line, so both Voice Mail and the machine can work
together without any problems. If each one has a separate telephone number, neither will interfere with the other's operations.
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring service from the telephone company, you will need to follow the directions on next page to
“register” the new Distinctive Ring pattern they give you. This is so your machine can recognize its incoming calls.
6
Note
You can change or cancel the Distinctive
Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it off temporarily, and turn it back on later.
When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this feature.
Before you choose the ring pattern to register
6
You can only register one Distinctive Ring pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns cannot be registered. The ring patterns below are supported by your Brother machine.
Register the one your telephone company gives you.
6
2
3
Ring
Pattern
1
4
Rings
long-long short-long-short short-short-long very long
(normal pattern)
43
Chapter 6
Note
Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short and is the most commonly used.
If the ring pattern you received is not on this chart, please call your telephone
company and ask for one that is
shown.
The machine will only answer calls to its registered number.
The first two rings are silent on the machine. This is because the fax must
“listen” to the ring pattern (to compare it to the pattern that was “registered”). (Other telephones on the same line will ring.)
If you program the machine properly, it will recognize the registered ring pattern of the
“fax number” within 2 ring patterns and then answer with a fax tones. When the
“voice number” is called, the machine will not answer.
Registering the Distinctive Ring pattern
Very Important !
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature to On, your Distinctive Ring number will receive faxes automatically. The Receive
Mode is automatically set to Manual and you cannot change it to another Receive Mode while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This ensures the Brother machine will only answer the Distinctive Ring number and will not interfere when your main telephone number is called. When Distinctive Ring is on, the
LCD will show D/R as the Receive Mode.
6
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
e
Press Miscellaneous.
44
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals f
Press a or b to display Distinctive.
g
Press Distinctive.
h
Press Set.
i
Press the stored ring pattern you want to use.
Press OK.
(You will hear each pattern as you scroll through the four patterns. Make sure you choose the pattern that the telephone company gave you.) j
Press Stop/Exit.
Distinctive Ring is now set to On.
Turning off Distinctive Ring
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
e
Press Miscellaneous.
f
Press a or b to display Distinctive.
g
Press Distinctive.
h
Press Off.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
6
Note
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the machine will stay in Manual mode. You will need to set the Receive Mode again.
(See Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
Connecting an external
TAD (telephone answering device)
6
You may choose to connect an external answering device. However, when you have an external TAD on the same telephone line as the machine, the TAD answers all calls and the machine “listens” for fax calling
(CNG) tones. If it hears them, the machine takes over the call and receives the fax. If it does not hear CNG tones, the machine lets the TAD continue playing your outgoing message so your caller can leave you a voice message.
The TAD must answer within four rings (the recommended setting is two rings). The machine cannot hear CNG tones until the
TAD has answered the call, and with four rings there are only 8 to 10 seconds of CNG tones left for the fax “handshake.” Make sure you carefully follow the instructions in this guide for recording your outgoing message.
We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your external answering machine if it exceeds five rings.
Note
• If you do not receive all your faxes, shorten the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.
• If You Subscribe to your Telephone
company's Distinctive Ring Service:
You may connect an external TAD to a separate wall jack only if you subscribe to your telephone company's Distinctive
Ring service, have registered the distinctive ring pattern on your machine, and use that number as a fax number. The recommended setting is at least four rings on the external TAD when you have the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service. You cannot use the Toll Saver setting.
Telephone services and external devices
• If You Do Not Subscribe to the
Distinctive Ring Service:
You must plug your TAD into the EXT. jack of your machine. If your TAD is plugged into a wall jack, both your machine and the TAD will try to control the telephone line. (See the illustration below.)
• Before you connect the external TAD, remove the protective cap (2) from the
EXT. jack on the machine.
1
1
6
2
1 TAD
2 Protective Cap
When the TAD answers a call, the LCD shows Telephone.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line.
45
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 6
Connections
The external TAD must be plugged into the jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack
(unless you are using Distinctive Ring).
a
Plug the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack into the jack labeled
LINE.
b
Remove the protective cap (1) from the jack labeled EXT., and then plug the telephone line cord from the external
TAD into the EXT. jack. (Make sure this cord is connected to the TAD at the
TAD's telephone line jack, and not its handset jack.)
1 c
Set your external TAD to four rings or less. (The machine's Ring Delay setting does not apply.) d
Record the outgoing message on your external TAD.
e
Set the TAD to answer calls.
f
Set the Receive Mode to
correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
6
Recording an outgoing message (OGM) on an external TAD
Timing is important in recording this message.
The message sets up the ways to handle both manual and automatic fax reception.
a
Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. (This allows your machine time to listen for the fax
CNG tones of automatic transmissions before they stop.) b
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
c
End your 20-second message by giving your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes. For example:
“After the beep, leave a message or send a fax by pressing l 5 1 and Start.”
Note
We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5-second silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a resonant or loud voice. You may try omitting this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving, then you must re-record the OGM to include it.
Multi-line connections (PBX)
6
We suggest you ask the company who installed your PBX to connect your machine.
If you have a multi-line system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the machine being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator we recommend that you set the Receive Mode to Manual.
We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate properly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company who handles your PBX.
6
46
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
External and extension telephones
6
Connecting an external or extension telephone
You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.
Connect the telephone line cord to the jack labeled EXT.
Before you connect the external telephone, remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT. jack on the machine.
1
6
2
3
1 Extension telephone
2 External telephone
3 Protective Cap
When you are using a telephone on the same phone line, the LCD shows Telephone.
Telephone services and external devices
Using external and extension telephones
6
Using extension telephones
If you answer a fax call at an extension telephone, you can make your machine receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive
Code l 5 1.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an extension telephone by pressing the Telephone Answer Code # 5 1.
(See F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) on page 38.)
Using an external telephone
(connected to the EXT. jack of the machine)
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the machine, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing
Receive.
You can also use the Fax Receive Code
l
5 1.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the external telephone by pressing Hook.
If you answer a call and no one is on the line:
6
You should assume that you're receiving a manual fax.
Press l 5 1 and wait for the chirp or until the
LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.
Note
You can also use the Easy Receive feature to make your machine
automatically take the call. (See Easy
6
47
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 6
Using a non-Brother cordless external telephone
6
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the EXT. jack of the machine and you typically carry the cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you will have to go to the machine so you can press
Hook to send the call to the cordless handset.
Using remote codes
6
Fax Receive Code
If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by dialing the Fax Receive Code
l
5 1. Wait for the chirping sounds and then
replace the handset. (See Easy Receive on page 39.)
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the machine, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing
Receive.
6
Telephone Answer Code
If you receive a voice call and the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will start to sound the F/T
(pseudo/double) ring after the initial Ring
Delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T Ring off by pressing # 5 1 (make sure you press this
between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the external telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the machine by pressing Hook.
6
Changing the remote codes
The preset Fax Receive Code is l 5 1. The preset Telephone Answer Code is # 5 1. If you want to, you can replace them with your own codes.
6
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display Remote Codes.
g
Press Remote Codes.
h
Press On (or Off).
i
Do one of the following.
If you want to change the Fax
Receive Code, enter the new code.
If you do not want to change the Fax
Receive Code, press OK. Go to
j
Do one of the following.
If you want to change the Telephone
Answer Code, enter the new code.
If you do not want to change the
Telephone Answer Code, press OK.
k
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• If you are always disconnected when accessing your external TAD remotely, try changing the Fax Receive Code and
Telephone Answer Code to another threedigit code (such as # # # and 9 9 9).
• Remote Codes might not work with some telephone systems.
48
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
Dialing and storing numbers
7
How to dial
Manual dialing
Press all of the digits of the fax or telephone number.
7
One Touch Dialing
Your machine has 8 One Touch keys where you can store 16 fax or telephone numbers for automatic dialing.
7
7
Speed Dialing
7
a
Press (Phone Book).
Or, you can press then press Phone Book.
(FAX) and b
Press the 2-digit number you want to call. You can also display the numbers in alphabetical order by pressing
on LCD.
Note
If the LCD shows Not Registered when you enter a Speed Dial number that has not been stored at this location.
c
To send a fax, press Send a fax and
The machine dials the telephone number.
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine scans and sends the fax.
7
Press the One Touch key that stores the
number you want to call. (See Storing
One Touch Dial numbers on page 50.) To
access numbers 9 to 16, hold down Shift as you press the One Touch key.
49
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 7
Fax Redial
If you are sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press Redial/Pause, and then press
Black Start or Color Start to try again. If you want to make a second call to a number you recently dialed, you can press Redial/Pause and choose one of the last 30 numbers from the Outgoing Call List.
Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from the control panel. If you are sending a fax
automatically and the line is busy, the machine will automatically redial once after five minutes.
a
Press Redial/Pause.
b
Press the number you want to redial.
c
Press Send a fax.
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Note
In Real Time Transmission the automatic redial feature does not work when you are using the scanner glass.
7
Storing numbers
You can set up your machine to do the following types of easy dialing: One Touch,
Speed Dial and Groups for broadcasting faxes. When you dial a Quick Dial number, the LCD shows the number.
Note
If you lose electrical power, the Quick Dial numbers that are in the memory will not be lost.
Storing a pause
7
When you are storing One Touch or
Speed Dial numbers in the Phone Book, you can insert one or more 3.5-second pauses by pressing the
Touchscreen.
Pause
button on the
7
Storing One Touch Dial numbers
Your machine has 8 One Touch keys where you can store 16 fax or telephone numbers for automatic dialing. To access numbers
9 to 16 hold down Shift as you press the
One Touch key.
7
50
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a
Do one of the following:
Press the One Touch key where you want to store the number. If a number is not stored there, the LCD shows Not Registered
Register Now?
Press Yes.
Press (Phone Book), More, and Set One Touch Dial.
Then, enter the One Touch number where you want to store the number.
Press OK.
b
Do one of the following:
Enter the name (up to 16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
To store the number without a name, press OK.
c
Enter the fax or telephone number (up to
20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If you downloaded Internet Fax:
If you want to store an E-mail address to use with Internet fax or Scan to E-mail server, press and enter the E-mail
address and press OK. (See Entering Text on page 130.)
d
When the LCD shows your settings, press OK to confirm. e
Press Stop/Exit.
Dialing and storing numbers
Storing Speed Dial numbers
7
Names and numbers can be stored in 2-digit
Speed Dial locations. You can store up to
100 different Speed Dial numbers. When you dial you will only have to press a few buttons on the Touchscreen (for example: press
(Phone Book), the number you want to call and Send a fax).
a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press More.
c
Press Set Speed Dial.
d
Do one of the following:
Enter the name (up to 16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
To store the number without a name, press OK.
e
Enter the first fax or telephone number
(Fax/Tel1:) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen (up to 20 digits).
Press OK.
Note
If you want to store an E-mail address to use with Internet fax or Scan to E-mail server, press and enter the E-mail
address and press OK. (See Entering Text on page 130.)
f
Do one of the following:
Enter the second fax or telephone number (Fax/Tel2:) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen (up to 20 digits).
Press OK.
If you do not want to store a second number, press OK.
51
7
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 7 g
To choose where the number will be stored, do one of the following:
To accept the displayed next available Speed Dial location, press
OK.
To enter a different Speed Dial location, press the 2-digit number using the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different location.
h
When the LCD shows your settings, press OK to confirm.
i
Do one of the following:
To store another Speed Dial
To finish storing numbers, press
Stop/Exit.
Changing One Touch or
Speed Dial names or numbers
7
You can change or delete a One Touch or
Speed Dial name or number that has already been stored.
a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press More.
c
Do one of the following:
Press Change to edit the names or numbers.
Press Delete to delete all information in a Speed Dial or One
Touch location.
Press the number you want to delete.
Press OK.
Press Yes to confirm.
d
Press a or b to display the number you want to change.
e
Press the number you want to change.
Note
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
52
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f
Do one of the following:
If you want to change the name, press Name:
Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) by pressing the buttons
on the Touchscreen. (See Entering
Press OK.
If you want to change the first
Fax/Tel number, press Fax/Tel:
(One Touch Dial) or Fax/Tel1:
(Speed Dial).
Enter the new fax or telephone number (up to 20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
If you want to change the second
Fax/Tel number, press Fax/Tel2:
(Speed Dial).
Enter the new fax or telephone number (up to 20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
How to change the stored name or number:
If you want to change a character, press d or c to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then press . Re-enter the character.
g
Do one of the following:
Press OK to finish.
To change another One Touch or
Speed Dial number, repeat steps b
To change more details, go to f.
The LCD will display your settings.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dialing and storing numbers
53
7
8
Making copies
How to copy
The following steps show the basic copy operation. For details about each option, see the Advanced User’s Guide.
a
When you want to make a copy, press
(COPY) to illuminate it in blue.
Make sure you are in COPY mode.
8
The LCD shows:
1 b
Do one of the following to load your document:
Place the document face up in the
ADF.
(See Using the ADF on page 28.)
Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
(See Using the scanner glass on page 29.)
c
If you want more than one copy, enter the number (up to 99).
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Stop copying
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.
8
8
1 No. of Copies
Press the number box (1) and enter the number of copies you want.
Also you can enter the number of copies by pressing or on the screen (as shown above) or by using the dial pad.
Note
The default setting is FAX mode. You can change the amount of time that the machine stays in COPY mode after the last copy operation. (See Mode Timer in
chapter 1 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
54
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Copy settings
You can change the following copy settings.
Press COPY and then press d or c to scroll through the copy settings. When the setting you want is displayed, press it and choose your option.
(Basic User's Guide)
For details about changing the following copy
Paper Type
Paper Size
Tray Select
(Advanced User’s Guide)
For details about changing the following copy settings, see chapter 7:
Quality
Enlarge/Reduce
Page Layout
2 in 1 (ID)
Stack/Sort
Density
Ink Save Mode
Thin Paper Copy
Skew Adjustment
Book Copy
Watermark Copy
Duplex Copy
Favorite Settings
Note
If you want to sort copies, use the ADF.
8
Making copies
Paper Options
8
Paper Type
If you are copying on special paper, set the machine for the type of paper you are using to get the best print quality.
8
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Paper Type.
e
Press Paper Type.
f
Press Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Brother BP71, Brother BP61,
Other Glossy or Transparency.
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
8
Paper Size
If you are copying on paper other than Letter size, you will need to change the Paper Size setting. You can copy only on Letter, Legal,
Ledger, A4, A5, A3, Executive or Photo
4"
6" (10 15 cm) paper.
8
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document. c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Paper Size.
e
Press Paper Size.
f
Press Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4,
A5, A3, EXE or 4"x6".
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
55
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 8
Tray Select
You can temporarily change the tray for the next copy. To change the default tray setting
see Tray use in COPY mode on page 22.
8
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Tray Select.
e
Press Tray Select.
f
Press Tray#1, Tray#2 or
Auto Select.
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
Poster copy is not available when you use
Tray #2.
56
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive
9
PhotoCapture Center™ operations
9
Even if your machine is not connected to your computer, you can print photos directly from digital camera media or a USB Flash memory
drive. (See Print Images on page 60.)
You can scan documents and save them directly to a memory card or USB Flash
memory drive. (See How to scan to a memory
card or USB Flash memory drive on page 61.)
If your machine is connected to a computer, you can access a memory card or USB Flash memory drive that is inserted in the front of the machine from your computer.
(See PhotoCapture Center
™
for Windows
®
or
Remote Setup & PhotoCapture Center
™
for
Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide.)
Using a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive
9
Your Brother machine has media drives
(slots) for use with the following popular digital camera media: Memory Stick™,
Memory Stick PRO™, Memory Stick Duo™,
Memory Stick PRO Duo™, SD, SDHC,
MultiMedia Card, MultiMedia Card plus and
USB Flash memory drives.
The PhotoCapture Center™ feature lets you print digital photos from your digital camera at high resolution to get photo quality printing.
9
57
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 9
Getting started
Firmly put a memory card or USB Flash memory drive into the proper slot.
1 USB Flash memory drive
2
1
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only a USB Flash memory drive, a PictBridge-compatible camera, or a digital camera that uses the USB mass storage standard.
Any other USB devices are not supported.
2 Memory card slot
Slot
Upper slot
Compatible memory cards
Lower slot
Memory Stick™
Memory Stick PRO™
Memory Stick Duo™
Memory Stick PRO Duo™
Memory Stick Micro™
(Adapter required)
SD
SDHC
MultiMedia Card
MultiMedia Card plus mini SD (Adapter required) micro SD (Adapter required) micro SDHC (Adapter required)
MultiMedia Card mobile
(Adapter required)
58
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
IMPORTANT
DO NOT insert a Memory Stick Duo™ into the lower SD slot. Doing this may cause damage to the machine.
PHOTO CAPTURE key lights:
PHOTO CAPTURE light is on, the memory card or USB Flash memory drive is properly inserted.
PHOTO CAPTURE light is off, the memory card or USB Flash memory drive is not properly inserted.
PHOTO CAPTURE light is blinking, the memory card or USB Flash memory drive is being read or written to.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the memory card or USB Flash memory drive from the media drive (slot) or USB direct interface while the machine is reading or writing to the memory card or USB Flash memory drive (the PHOTO CAPTURE key is blinking). You will
lose your data or damage the card.
9
The machine can only read one memory card or USB Flash memory drive at a time.
59
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 9
Print Images
View Photos
You can preview your photos on the LCD before you print them. If your photos are large files there may be a delay before each photo is displayed on the LCD.
a
Make sure you have put the memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.
Press (PHOTO CAPTURE). b
Press View Photo(s).
Do one of the following:
If you want to choose photos to print or print more than one for an image,
If you want to print all photos, press .
Press Yes to confirm.
9
Note
• Four thumbnails are displayed at a time with the current page number and total number of pages listed under the thumbnails.
• Press d or c repeatedly to scroll through all photos. Hold down d or c to fast-forward and fast-rewind through the thumbnail pages.
• Press to start Slide Show.
c
Press a photo from the thumbnail.
d
Enter the number of copies you want either by pressing the number box and entering the number of copies or by pressing + or -.
Press OK.
9
e
Repeat step c and d until you have
chosen all the photos that you want to print.
f
After you have chosen all the photos, press OK. You now have the following options:
To add the Auto Correct effect to your chosen photos, press .
(See Enhance Photos in chapter 8 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
If you want to change the print settings, press Print Setting.
If you do not want to change any
g
Press Color Start to print.
60
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™ print settings
9
You can change the print settings for the next printing.
These settings are temporary, and the machine returns to its default settings
3 minutes after printing, unless you have set the Mode Timer to 2 minutes or less. (See
Mode Timer in chapter 1 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.)
Note
You can save the print settings you use most often by setting them as the default.
(See Setting your changes as the new
default in chapter 8 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.)
How to scan to a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive
You can scan black & white and color documents into a memory card or USB Flash memory drive. Black & white documents will be stored in PDF (*.PDF) or TIFF (*.TIF) file formats. Color documents may be stored in
PDF (*.PDF) or JPEG (*.JPG) file formats.
The factory setting is Color 200 dpi and the default file format is PDF. The machine automatically creates file names based on the current date. (For details, see the Quick
Setup Guide.) For example, the fifth image scanned on July 1, 2011 would be named
07011105.PDF. You can change the color and quality.
Quality
Color 100 dpi
Color 200 dpi
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
B/W 100 dpi
B/W 200 dpi
B/W 300 dpi
Selectable File
Format
JPEG / PDF
JPEG / PDF
JPEG / PDF
JPEG / PDF
TIFF / PDF
TIFF / PDF
TIFF / PDF a
Make sure you have put the memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive while
PHOTO CAPTURE is blinking to avoid damaging the card, USB Flash memory drive or the data stored on them.
9
9
61
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 9 b
Do one of the following:
If you want to scan a 2-sided document, load your document in the
ADF.
Press Stop/Exit to return to Ready mode.
Press Duplex, and then press Scan.
If you want to scan a single-sided document, load your document and press (SCAN).
c
Do one of the following:
If your document is flipped on the long edge, press
DuplexScan :LongEdge.
Long edge
Portrait Landscape
If your document is flipped on the short edge, press
DuplexScan :ShortEdge.
Short edge
Portrait Landscape d
Press to Media.
e
Do one of the following:
To change the quality, press d or c to display Quality.
Press Quality and choose
Color 100 dpi,
Color 200 dpi,
Color 300 dpi,
Color 600 dpi, B/W 100 dpi,
B/W 200 dpi or B/W 300 dpi.
To change the file type, press d or c to display File Type.
Press File Type and choose PDF,
JPEG or TIFF.
Note
If you are using the scanner glass of the machine you can change the glass scan size.
Press d or c to display
Glass Scan Size and choose Letter,
Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4.
If you want to change the file name, press d or c to display File Name.
Press File Name and enter the file name.
You can only change the first
6 characters.
Press OK.
To start scanning without changing
additional settings, go to step f.
Note
• If you chose color in the resolution setting, you cannot choose TIFF.
• If you chose black & white in the resolution setting, you cannot choose JPEG.
f
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Note
• You can scan a 2-sided document up to
Legal size from the ADF.
• You can place multiple documents on the scanner glass and scan them as separate files. (See Auto Crop in chapter 8 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
62
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
10
How to print from a computer
Printing a document
The machine can receive data from your computer and print it. To print from a computer, install the printer driver.
(See Printing for Windows
®
or Printing and
Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s
Guide for details about the print settings.) a
Install the Brother printer driver on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.) b
From your application, choose the Print command.
c
Choose the name of your machine in the
Print dialog box and click Properties. d
Choose the settings you want in the
Properties dialog box.
Media Type
Print Quality
Paper Size
Orientation
Color/Grayscale
Ink Save Mode
Scaling
e
Click OK.
f
Click OK to begin printing.
10
10
10
63
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
11
How to scan to a computer
Scanning a document
11
There are several ways to scan documents.
You can use the SCAN key on the machine or the scanner drivers on your computer.
a
To use the machine as a scanner, install a scanner driver. If the machine is on a
Network, configure it with a TCP/IP address.
Install the scanner drivers on the
Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide and Scanning in the
Software User’s Guide.)
Configure the machine with a TCP/IP address if network scanning does not work. (See Configuring Network
Scanning in the Software User’s
Guide.) b
Load your document. (See How to load
Use the ADF to scan multiple pages of documents or 2-sided documents.
It feeds each sheet automatically.
Use the scanner glass to scan a page of a book or one sheet at a time.
c
Do one of the following:
To scan using the SCAN key, go to
To scan using a scanner driver at
your computer, go to Scanning using
Scanning using the
SCAN key
For more information, see Using the Scan
key in the Software User’s Guide.
a
Press (SCAN).
b
Choose the SCAN mode you want.
to File
to Media
to Network
to FTP
to Email
1
to OCR
to Image
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you download and install Presto! PageManager from http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/
PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
c
(For network users)
Choose the computer you want to send the data to.
d
Press Start to begin scanning.
11
Scanning using a scanner driver
For more information, see Scanning a
document using the TWAIN driver or
Scanning a document using the WIA driver in the Software User’s Guide.
a
Start a scanning application and click the Scan button.
b
Adjust the settings such as Resolution,
Brightness and Scan Type in the
Scanner Setup dialog box.
c
Click Start or Scan to begin scanning.
11
64
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
11
A
Routine maintenance
A
Replacing the ink cartridges
Your machine is equipped with an ink dot counter. The ink dot counter automatically monitors the level of ink in each of the four cartridges. When the machine detects an ink cartridge is running out of ink, the machine will tell you with a message on the LCD.
The LCD will tell you which ink cartridge is low or needs replacing. Be sure to follow the LCD prompts to replace the ink cartridges in the correct order.
Even though the machine tells you to replace an ink cartridge, there will be a small amount of ink left in the ink cartridge. It is necessary to keep some ink in the ink cartridge to prevent air from drying out and damaging the print head assembly.
IMPORTANT
Brother strongly recommends that you do not refill the ink cartridges provided with your machine. We also strongly recommend that you continue to use only
Genuine Brother Brand replacement ink cartridges. Use or attempted use of potentially incompatible ink and/or cartridges in the Brother machine may cause damage to the machine and/or may result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our warranty coverage does not apply to any problem that is caused by the use of unauthorized third-party ink and/or cartridges. To protect your investment and obtain premium performance from the
Brother machine, we strongly recommend the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.
A
a
Open the ink cartridge cover.
If one or more of the ink cartridges have reached the end of their life, the LCD shows B&W Print Only or
Cannot Print.
b
Press the lock release lever as shown to release the cartridge for the color indicated on the LCD. Remove the cartridge from the machine.
c
Open the new ink cartridge bag for the color shown on the LCD, and then take out the ink cartridge.
A
65
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d
Turn the green release lever on the orange protective packing (1) clockwise until it clicks to release the vacuum seal.
Then remove the orange protective packing as shown.
f
Gently push the back of the ink cartridge marked “PUSH” until it clicks, and then close the ink cartridge cover.
1
1 e
Each color has its own correct position.
Insert the ink cartridge in the direction of the arrow on the label.
g
The machine will automatically reset the ink dot counter.
Note
• If you replaced an ink cartridge, for example Black, the LCD may ask you to verify that it was a brand new one (for example, Did You Change
Black).
For each new cartridge you installed, press Yes to automatically reset the ink dot counter for that color. If the ink cartridge you installed is not a brand new one, be sure to press No.
• If the LCD shows No Ink Cartridge or
Cannot Detect after you install the ink cartridges, check that the ink cartridges are installed properly. Remove the ink cartridge and reinstall it slowly until it clicks.
CAUTION
If ink gets in your eyes, wash it out with water at once and call a doctor if you are concerned.
66
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT take out ink cartridges if you do not need to replace them. If you do so, it may reduce the ink quantity and the machine will not know the quantity of ink left in the cartridge.
• DO NOT touch the cartridge insertion slots. If you do so, the ink may stain your skin.
• If ink gets on your skin or clothing immediately wash it off with soap or detergent.
• If you mix the colors by installing an ink cartridge in the wrong position, clean the print head several times after correcting the cartridge installation.
• Once you open an ink cartridge, install it in the machine and use it up within six months of installation. Use unopened ink cartridges by the expiration date written on the cartridge package.
• DO NOT dismantle or tamper with the ink cartridge; this can cause the ink to leak out of the cartridge.
Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine
Cleaning the scanner
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
b
Lift the document cover (1). Clean the scanner glass (2) and the white plastic (3) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with a non-flammable glass cleaner.
1
3
A
A
2 c
In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the glass strip (2) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with a non-flammable glass cleaner.
A
1
2
67
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d
Close the document cover and open the
ADF cover.
Clean the white bar (1) and the glass strip (2) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with a non-flammable glass cleaner.
1
2 e
Close the ADF cover.
f
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass and glass strip with a non-flammable glass cleaner, run your fingertip over the glass to see if you can feel anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris, clean the glass again concentrating on that area. You may need to repeat the cleaning process three or four times. To test, make a copy after each cleaning attempt.
i
When there is a spot of dirt or correction fluid on the glass strip the printed sample shows a vertical line.
After the glass strip is cleaned the vertical line is gone.
68
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the print head
To maintain good print quality, the machine will automatically clean the print head when needed. You can start the cleaning process manually if there is a print quality problem.
Clean the print head and ink cartridges if you get a horizontal line in the text or graphics, or blank text on your printed pages. You can clean Black only, three colors at a time
(Yellow/Cyan/Magenta), or all four colors at once.
Cleaning the print head consumes ink.
Cleaning too often uses ink unnecessarily.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching the print head may cause permanent damage and may void the print head's warranty.
A
a
Press .
b
Press Cleaning.
c
Press Black, Color or All.
The machine cleans the print head.
When cleaning is finished, the machine will go back to the Ready screen automatically.
Note
If you clean the print head at least five times and the print has not improved, try installing a new Genuine Brother Brand replacement ink cartridge for each problem color. Try cleaning the print head again up to five more times. If the print has not improved call Brother Customer
Service. (See Brother numbers on page i.)
Checking the print quality
If faded or streaked colors and text appear on your printouts, some of the print head nozzles may be clogged. You can check this by printing the Print Quality Check Sheet and looking at the nozzle check pattern.
A
a
Press .
b
Press Test Print.
c
Press Print Quality.
d
Press Color Start.
The machine begins printing the Print
Quality Check Sheet.
e
Check the quality of the four color blocks on the sheet.
f
The LCD asks you if the print quality is
OK.
Do one of the following:
If all lines are clear and visible, press
Yes to finish the Print Quality check
If you can see missing short lines as shown below, press No.
OK Poor
Routine maintenance i
After cleaning is finished, press
Color Start.
The machine starts printing the Print
Quality Check Sheet again and then
j
Press Stop/Exit.
If you repeat this procedure at least five times and the print quality is still poor, replace the ink cartridge for the clogged color.
After replacing the ink cartridge, check the print quality. If the problem still exists, repeat the cleaning and test print procedures at least five times for the new ink cartridge. If ink is still missing, call Brother Customer Service. (See
IMPORTANT
DO NOT touch the print head. Touching the print head may cause permanent damage and may void the print head's warranty.
Note
i
A
g
The LCD asks you if the print quality is
OK for black and the three colors.
Press Yes or No.
h
The LCD asks you if you want to start cleaning.
Press Color Start.
The machine starts cleaning the print head.
When a print head nozzle is clogged the printed sample looks like this.
After the print head nozzle is cleaned, the horizontal lines are gone.
69
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Checking the print alignment
A
You may need to adjust the print alignment after transporting the machine if your printed text becomes blurred or images become faded.
a
Press .
b
Press Test Print.
c
Press Alignment.
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine starts printing the
Alignment Check Sheet.
e
For the “A” pattern, press the number of the test print that has the least visible vertical stripes (1-9).
f
For the “B” pattern, press the number of the test print that has the least visible vertical stripes (1-9).
g
For the “C” pattern, press the number of the test print that has the least visible vertical stripes (1-9).
h
For the “D” pattern, press the number of the test print that has the least visible vertical stripes (1-9).
i
Press Stop/Exit.
70
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
B
Troubleshooting
B
Error and Maintenance messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the problem and shows a message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown below.
You can correct most errors and clear routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need more help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
B
Error Message
B&W Print Only
Replace Ink
Cause
One or more of the color ink cartridges have reached the end of their life.
You can use the machine in black & white mode for approximately four weeks depending on the number of pages you print.
While this message appears on the
LCD, each operation works in the following way:
Printing
If you click Grayscale in the
Advanced tab of the printer driver you can use the machine as a black & white printer.
Copying
If the paper type is set to
Plain Paper you can make copies in black & white.
Duplex copy is not available when this message appears.
Faxing
If the paper type is set to
Plain Paper or
Inkjet Paper, the machine will receive and print the faxes in black & white.
If a sending machine has a color fax, the machine’s “handshake” will ask that the fax be sent as black & white.
If the paper type is set to
Other Glossy, Brother BP71 or
Brother BP61 the machine will stop all print operations.
Action
Replace the ink cartridges. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
If you unplug the machine or take out the ink cartridge, you cannot use the machine until you change to a new ink cartridge.
B
71
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Error Message
Cannot Detect
Cannot Print
Replace Ink
Comm.Error
Connection Fail
Cover is Open.
Data Remaining
Disconnected
Cause
You installed a new ink cartridge too quickly and the machine did not detect it.
If you are not using Genuine Brother
Innobella™ ink the machine may not detect the ink cartridge.
An ink cartridge is not installed properly.
Action
Take out the new ink cartridge and re-install it slowly until it clicks.
Use a new Genuine Brother
Innobella™ Ink Cartridge. If the error is not cleared, call Brother Customer
Service.
Take out the new ink cartridge and re
install it slowly until it clicks. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
Replace the ink cartridges. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
One or more of the ink cartridges have reached the end of their life. The machine will stop all print operations.
While memory is available, black and white faxes will be stored in the memory. If a sending machine has a color fax, the machine's “handshake” will ask that the fax be sent as black & white. If the sending machine has the ability to convert it, the color fax will be stored in the memory as a black & white fax.
Poor telephone line quality caused a communication error.
You tried to poll a fax machine that is not in Polled Waiting mode.
The scanner cover is not completely closed.
The ADF cover is not completely closed.
The ink cartridge cover is not completely closed.
Print data is left in the machine's memory.
The other person or other person's fax machine stopped the call.
Document Jam/too Long
The document was not inserted or fed properly, or the document scanned from the ADF was too long.
Send the fax again or connect the machine to another telephone line. If the problem continues, call the telephone company and ask them to check your telephone line.
Check the other fax machine's polling setup.
Lift the scanner cover and then close it again.
Open the ADF cover and then close it again.
Firmly close the ink cartridge cover until it clicks.
Press Stop/Exit. The machine will cancel the job and clear it from the memory. Try to print again.
Try to send or receive again.
If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the Compatibility
to Basic (for VoIP). (See Telephone
line interference / VoIP on page 98.)
(See Using the ADF on page 28.)
(See Document jam on page 80.)
72
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Error Message
DR Mode in Use
High Temperature
Hub is Unusable.
Cause
The machine is set to Distinctive Ring mode. You cannot change the
Receive Mode from Manual to another mode.
The print head is too warm.
A Hub or USB Flash memory drive with Hub has been connected to the
USB direct interface.
Action
Set Distinctive Ring to Off. (See
Turning off Distinctive Ring on page 44.)
Allow the machine to cool down.
A Hub or USB Flash memory drive with Hub are not supported. Unplug the device from the USB direct interface.
Choose a regularly proportioned image.
Image Too Long.
The proportions of your photo are irregular so effects could not be added.
Image Too Small.
The size of your photo is too small to trim.
Ink Absorber Full
The ink absorber box or flushing box is full. These components are periodic maintenance items that may require replacement after a period of time to ensure optimum performance from your Brother machine. The need to replace these items and the time period before replacement is dependent on the number of purges and flushes required to clean the ink system. These boxes acquire amounts of ink during the different purging and flushing operations. The number of times a machine purges and flushes for cleaning varies depending on different situations. For example, frequently powering the machine on and off will cause numerous cleaning cycles since the machine automatically cleans upon power up. The use of non-Brother ink may cause frequent cleanings because non-Brother ink could cause poor print quality which is resolved by cleaning. The more cleaning the machine requires the faster these boxes will fill up.
Choose a larger image.
The ink absorber box or flushing box will need to be replaced. Contact
Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to have
your machine serviced. (See Brother
Other reasons for cleaning are:
1 Machine automatically cleans after clearing a printer jam.
2 Machine automatically cleans after sitting idle for more than 45 days
(infrequent use).
Note
Repairs resulting from the use of non-Brother supplies may not be covered under the stated product warranty.
B
73
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Error Message Cause
Ink Absorber NearFull
The ink absorber box or flushing box is nearly full.
Ink low
Low Temperature
Media Error
One or more of the ink cartridges are near the end of their life. If one of the color ink cartridges is near the end of its life and a sending machine has a color fax to send, your machine’s
“handshake” will ask that the fax be sent as black & white. If the sending machine has the ability to convert it, the color fax will be printed at your machine as a black & white fax.
The print head is too cold.
The memory card is either corrupted, improperly formatted, or there is a problem with the memory card.
Action
The ink absorber box or flushing box will need to be replaced soon. Call
Brother Customer Service or a Brother
Authorized Service Center to have
your machine serviced. (See Brother
Order a new ink cartridge. You can continue printing until the LCD shows
accessories and supplies on page ii
and Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
Media is Full.
No Caller ID
No File
No Ink Cartridge
The memory card or USB Flash memory drive you are using has no available space or already contains
999 files.
There is no incoming call history. You did not receive calls or you have not subscribed to the Caller ID service from your telephone company.
The memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the media drive does not contain a .JPG file.
An ink cartridge is not installed properly.
Allow the machine to warm up.
Put the card firmly into the slot again to make sure it is in the correct position.
If the error remains, check the media drive (slot) of the machine by putting in another memory card that you know is working.
Your machine can only save to your memory card or USB Flash memory drive if it contains less than 999 files.
Delete unused files to free some space and try again.
If you want to use the Caller ID feature call your telephone company. (See
Caller ID in chapter 5 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.)
Put the correct memory card or USB
Flash memory drive into the slot again.
Take out the new ink cartridge and reinstall it slowly until it clicks. (See
Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
74
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Error Message
No Paper Fed
No Response/Busy
Not Registered
Cause
The machine is out of paper or paper is not properly loaded in the paper tray.
Action
Do one of the following:
Refill the paper in the paper tray, and then press Black Start or
Color Start.
Remove the paper and load it again, and then press Black Start
paper and other print media on page 10.)
The paper is jammed in the machine.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Printer jam or
If you see this error often when making a duplex copy or duplex print, the paper feed rollers may be stained with ink. Clean the paper feed rollers. (See
Cleaning the paper feed rollers in
appendix A of the Advanced User's
Guide.)
Paper powder has accumulated on the surface of the paper pick-up rollers and the back sides of the paper feed rollers.
The Jam Clear Cover is not closed properly.
Clean the paper pick
up rollers and the back sides of the paper feed rollers. (See Cleaning the paper
pick-up rollers in appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
Make sure the Jam Clear Cover is closed evenly at both ends. (See
Printer jam or paper jam on page 81.)
The paper was not inserted in the center position of the manual feed slot.
Remove the paper and re-insert it in the center of the manual feed slot, and then press Black Start or
Color Start. (See Loading paper in
the manual feed slot on page 17.)
Verify the number and try again.
The number you dialed does not answer or is busy.
You tried to access a One Touch or
Speed Dial number that is not programmed.
Set up the One Touch or Speed Dial
number. (See Storing One Touch Dial
numbers on page 50 and Storing
Speed Dial numbers on page 51.)
B
75
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Error Message Cause
Out of Fax Memory
The fax memory is full.
Out of Memory
The machine's memory is full.
The memory card or USB Flash memory drive you are using does not have enough free space to scan the document.
Paper Jam [Front]
Paper is jammed in the machine.
Paper Jam [Front,Rear] Paper is jammed in the machine.
More than one sheet of paper was placed in the manual feed slot.
—
OR
—
Another sheet of paper was placed in the manual feed slot before the LCD showed
Put paper in Manual Feed Slot
Then Press Start.
Action
Do one of the following:
Clear the data in the memory. To gain extra memory, you can turn off Memory Receive. (See Turning
off Memory Receive operations in
chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s
Guide.)
Print the faxes that are in the memory. (See Printing a fax from
the memory in chapter 4 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
If a copy operation is in process:
Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other operations finish, and then try again.
Delete unused files from your memory card or USB Flash memory drive to make some free space and then try again.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the front of the machine on page 81.
Make sure the paper length guide is set to the correct paper size. DO NOT extend the paper tray when you load
A5 or smaller size paper.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the front and back of the machine on page 83.
Make sure the paper length guide is set to the correct paper size. DO NOT extend the paper tray when you load
A5 or smaller size paper.
Do not put more than one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot at any one time. Wait until the LCD shows
Put paper in Manual Feed Slot
Then Press Start before you feed the next sheet of paper in the manual feed slot.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the front and back of the machine on page 83.
76
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Error Message
Paper Jam [Rear]
Touchscreen initialization failed
Unable to Clean XX
Unable to Init. XX
Unable to Print XX
Unable to Scan XX
Unusable Device
Disconnect device from front connector & turn machine off & then on
Unusable Device
Please Disconnect
USB Device.
Wrong Ink Color
Cause
Paper is jammed in the machine.
Paper powder has accumulated on the surface of the paper pick-up rollers and the back sides of the paper feed rollers.
The Touchscreen was pressed before the power on initialization was completed.
Debris may be stuck between the lower part of the touchscreen and its frame.
Action
Remove the jammed paper by
following the steps in Paper is jammed
at the back of the machine on page 82.
Make sure the paper length guide is set to the correct paper size.
DO NOT extend the paper tray when you load A5 or smaller size paper.
Clean the paper pick
up rollers and the back sides of the paper feed rollers. (See Cleaning the paper
pick-up rollers in appendix A of the
Advanced User's Guide.)
Make sure that nothing is touching or resting on the Touchscreen.
The machine has a mechanical problem.
—
OR
—
A foreign object such as a paper clip or ripped paper is in the machine.
A broken device has been connected to the USB direct interface.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back and forth to push out the debris.
Open the scanner cover and remove any foreign objects and paper scraps from inside the machine. If the error message continues, disconnect the machine from the power for several minutes and reconnect it.
(The machine can be turned off for approximately 24 hours without losing faxes stored in the memory. See
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
Unplug the device from the USB direct interface, then press On/Off to turn the machine off and then on again.
A USB device or USB Flash memory drive that is not supported has been connected to the USB direct interface.
For more information, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
A color ink cartridge has been installed in the Black ink cartridge position.
Unplug the device from the USB direct interface. Turn the machine off and then on again.
Check which ink cartridges are not matched by color to their ink cartridge positions and move them to their proper positions.
B
77
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Error Message
Wrong Paper Size
Wrong Tray Setting
Cause
The Paper Size setting does not match the size of paper in the tray. Or, you did not set the paper guides in the tray to the indicators for the paper size you are using.
The machine’s Paper Size and Tray
Use settings do not match the size of paper in the tray you are using.
Action
1 Check that the paper size you choose matches the size of paper in the tray.
2 Make sure you loaded the paper in a Portrait position, by setting the paper guides at the indicators for your paper size.
3 After you have checked the paper size and the paper position, press
Black Start or Color Start to continue printing.
1 Press Tray Setting, and make sure the machine’s Paper Size and
Tray Use settings match the size of paper in the tray you are using.
(See Paper Size and Type on page 22 and Tray use in COPY
2 After you have checked the paper size and tray use settings, press
Black Start or Color Start to continue printing.
78
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Error animation
Error animations display step-by-step instructions when paper gets jammed. You can read the steps at your own pace by pressing c to see the next step and d to go backward.
B
Transferring your faxes or Fax
Journal report
B
If the LCD shows:
Unable to Clean XX
Unable to Init. XX
Unable to Print XX
Unable to Scan XX
We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your PC. (See
Transferring faxes to another fax machine on page 79 or Transferring faxes to your PC on page 79.)
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you need to
transfer. (See Transferring the Fax Journal
report to another fax machine on page 80.)
Transferring faxes to another fax machine
If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
Station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)
B
a
Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error temporarily.
b
Press MENU.
c
Press a or b to display Service.
d
Press Service.
e
Press Data Transfer.
f
Press Fax Transfer.
Troubleshooting g
Do one of the following:
If the LCD shows No Data, there are no faxes left in the machine's memory.
Press Stop/Exit.
Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded. h
Press Black Start.
Transferring faxes to your PC
You can transfer the faxes from your machine's memory to your PC. a
Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error temporarily.
b
Make sure you have installed
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then turn on PC-FAX Receiving on the PC.
(For details see PC-FAX receiving in the
Software User’s Guide.) c
Make sure you have set PC-Fax
Receive on the machine. (See PC-Fax
Receive (Windows
®
only) in chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the faxes to your PC.
d
Do one of the following:
To transfer all faxes to your PC, press Yes. You will be asked if you want to also turn on backup print.
To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press No.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
B
B
79
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine
B
If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your
Station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.) a
Press Stop/Exit to interrupt the error temporarily.
b
Press MENU.
c
Press a or b to display Service.
d
Press Service.
e
Press Data Transfer.
f
Press Report Trans.
g
Enter the fax number to which the Fax
Journal report will be forwarded.
h
Press Black Start.
Document jam
Documents can jam in the ADF unit if they are not inserted or fed properly, or if they are too long. Follow the steps below to clear a document jam.
B
Document is jammed in the top of the
ADF unit
B
a
Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
b
Open the ADF cover.
c
Pull the jammed document out to the right.
d
Close the ADF cover.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
IMPORTANT
To avoid future document jams close the
ADF cover properly by pressing it down in the middle.
80
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Document is jammed inside the ADF unit
B
a
Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
b
Lift the document cover.
c
Pull the jammed document out to the right.
Troubleshooting c
Close the document cover.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
Printer jam or paper jam
Take out the jammed paper depending on where it is jammed in the machine.
B
Paper is jammed at the front of the machine
If the LCD shows Paper Jam [Front], follow these steps: a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
b
Pull the paper tray (1) completely out of the machine.
B
d
Close the document cover.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Removing small documents jammed in the ADF
B
a
Lift the document cover.
b
Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.
c
Pull out the jammed paper (1).
1
B
1
81
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d
Lift the Jam Clear flap, and remove the jammed paper.
Paper is jammed at the back of the machine
If the LCD shows Paper Jam [Rear], follow these steps: a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
B
Note
Make sure you remove paper from the manual feed slot, and then close it.
b
Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the back of the machine.
e
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
1 c
Pull the jammed paper out of the machine.
Note
Make sure you pull out the paper support until it clicks.
f
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
If there is a repeat paper jam, a small piece of paper may be stuck in the
machine. (See Additional paper jam clear
82
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d
Close the Jam Clear Cover. Make sure the cover is closed properly.
Troubleshooting b
Pull paper tray #1 (1) and then tray #2 (2) completely out of the machine.
1 e
Re-connect the power cord.
Paper is jammed at the front and back of the machine
B
If the LCD shows
Paper Jam [Front,Rear], follow these steps: a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
Note
Make sure you remove paper from the manual feed slot, and then close it.
c
Pull out the jammed paper (1).
2
1
1
B
83
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d
Lift the flap, and remove the jammed paper.
(With trays removed, go to step e.)
f
Pull the jammed paper out of the machine.
e
Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the back of the machine.
g
Close the Jam Clear Cover. Make sure the cover is closed properly.
1
84
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
h
Put paper tray #1 (1) and then tray #2 (2) firmly back in the machine.
1
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• If the paper is jammed under the print head, unplug the machine from the power source, and then move the print head to take out the paper.
• If the print head is at the right corner as shown in the illustration, you cannot move the print head. Re-connect the power cord. Hold down Stop/Exit until the print head moves to the middle. Then unplug the machine from the power source and take out the paper.
2 i
Using both hands, use the finger holds on each side of the machine to lift the scanner cover (1) into the open position.
Move the print head (if necessary) to take out any paper remaining in this area. Make sure that jammed paper is not left in the corners of the machine (2) and (3).
1
• If ink gets on your skin or clothing immediately wash it off with soap or detergent.
B
3
2
85
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
j
Gently close the scanner cover using the finger holds on each side.
Additional paper jam clear operations
B
a
Using both hands, use the finger holds on each side of the machine to lift the scanner cover into the open position.
Note
If the print head is at the right corner as shown in the illustration, hold down
Stop/Exit until the print head moves to the middle.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the scanner cover.
Always use the finger holds provided on each side of the scanner cover when opening and closing it.
Note
Make sure you pull out the paper support until it clicks.
k
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
If there is a repeat paper jam, a small piece of paper may be stuck in the
machine. (See Additional paper jam clear
b
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
c
Gently close the scanner cover using the finger holds on each side.
86
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the scanner cover.
Always use the finger holds provided on each side of the scanner cover when opening and closing it.
d
Open the manual feed slot cover.
Troubleshooting f
Re-connect the power cord.
The paper you placed in the manual feed slot will be fed through the machine and ejected.
g
Using both hands, use the finger holds on each side of the machine to lift the scanner cover into the open position.
Make sure that a piece of paper is not still jammed inside the machine.
Gently close the scanner cover using the finger holds on each side.
e
Put only one sheet of letter or A4 sized thick paper such as glossy paper in a
Landscape position in the manual feed slot.
Push it into the manual feed slot.
B
Note
• We recommend you use glossy paper.
• If you don't push the paper deep into the manual feed slot, the machine will not feed it when you re-connect the power cord.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
87
Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from within that country.
If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.
Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother
Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability.
If you are having difficulty with your machine
B
B
Printing
Difficulty
No printout.
Suggestions
Check the interface cable or wireless connection on both the machine and your computer. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.
One or more ink cartridges have reached the end of their life.
(See Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message.
(See Error and Maintenance messages on page 71.)
If the LCD shows Cannot Print and Replace Ink, see Replacing the ink
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.
Make sure that the machine is online. Click Start and then Printers and Faxes.
Right-click and choose Brother MFC-XXXXX (where XXXXX is your model name), and make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.
88
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Printing (continued)
Difficulty
Poor print quality.
Suggestions
Check the print quality. (See Checking the print quality on page 69.)
Make sure that the Media Type setting in the printer driver or the Paper Type setting in the machine’s menu matches the type of paper you are using. (See
Printing for Windows
®
or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s
Guide and Paper Size and Type on page 22.)
Make sure that your ink cartridges are fresh. The following may cause ink to clog:
The expiration date written on the cartridge package has passed. (Genuine
Brother Innobella™ ink cartridges stay usable for up to two years if kept in their original packaging.)
The ink cartridge has been in your machine for over six months.
White horizontal lines appear in text or graphics.
The ink cartridge may not have been stored properly before use.
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink. Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability.
Use the recommended types of paper.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 24.)
The recommended environment for your machine is between 68
F to 91 F
(20
C to 33 C).
Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 68.)
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
The machine prints blank pages.
Characters and lines are blurred.
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
Check the printing alignment. (See Checking the print alignment on page 70.)
Printed text or images are skewed.
Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray and the paper side guides
are adjusted correctly. (See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)
Make sure the Jam Clear Cover is closed properly.
Smudge or stain at the top center of the printed page.
Make sure the paper is not too thick or curled.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 24.)
Printing appears dirty or ink seems to run.
Try using the recommended types of paper.
(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 24.)
Clean the print head. (See Cleaning the print head on page 68.)
Stains appear on the reverse side or at the bottom of the page.
Make sure you are using the recommended types of paper. (See Acceptable
paper and other print media on page 24.) Don't handle the paper until the ink is
dry.
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
If you are using photo paper, make sure that you have set the correct paper type.
If you are printing a photo from your PC, set the Media Type in the Basic tab of the printer driver.
Make sure the printer platen is not dirty with ink. (See Cleaning the machine’s
printer platen in appendix A of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
The machine prints dense lines on the page.
Make sure you are using the paper support flap.
(See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)
Check Reverse Order in the Basic tab of the printer driver.
B
89
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing (continued)
Difficulty
The printouts are wrinkled.
Suggestions
(Windows
®
users)
In the printer driver Advanced tab, click Color Settings, and uncheck
Bi-Directional Printing.
(Macintosh users)
In the printer driver, choose Print Settings, click Advanced, choose
Other Print Options, and uncheck Bi-Directional Printing.
Make sure you are using Genuine Brother Innobella™ Ink.
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the same.
Cannot perform “Page Layout” printing.
Print speed is too slow.
Turn the borderless feature off. Borderless printing is slower than normal printing.
(See Printing for Windows
®
or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software
User’s Guide.)
True2Life™ is not working properly. If the image data is not full color in your application (such as 256 color),
True2Life™ will not work. Use at least 24 bit color data with the True2Life™ feature.
Photo paper does not feed properly.
Try changing the printer driver setting. The highest resolution needs longer data processing, sending and printing time. Try the other quality settings in the printer driver Advanced tab. Also, click Color Settings, and make sure you uncheck
Color Enhancement (True2Life).
Machine feeds multiple pages.
When you print on Brother Photo paper, load one extra sheet of the same photo paper in the paper tray. An extra sheet has been included in the paper package for this purpose.
Clean the paper pick
up rollers. (See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers in
appendix A of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Make sure the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and
other print media on page 10.)
There is a paper jam.
Paper jam reoccurs.
The paper jams when you use duplex copy or duplex print.
Load only one size of paper and one type of paper in the paper tray at any one time.
Make sure the paper length guide is set to the correct paper size. Do not extend
the paper tray when you load A5 or smaller size paper. (See Printer jam or paper
If there is a repeat paper jam, a small piece of paper may be stuck in the machine.
Make sure paper is not still jammed in the machine. (See Additional paper jam
Use one of the jam prevention settings, DX1 or DX2. For copying, see Duplex
(2-sided) copying in chapter 7 of the Advanced User’s Guide; for printing see Duplex / Booklet for Windows
®
or Duplex Printing for Macintosh in the Software User's Guide.
If paper jams often when using duplex copy or duplex print, the paper feed rollers may be stained with ink. Clean the paper feed rollers. (See Cleaning the paper
feed rollers in appendix A of the Advanced User's Guide.)
Printed pages are not stacked neatly.
Make sure you are using the paper support flap.
(See Loading paper and other print media on page 10.)
Machine does not print from
Adobe
®
Illustrator
®
.
Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Printing for Windows
®
or Printing and
Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User’s Guide.)
90
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Printing Received Faxes
Difficulty
Condensed print and white streaks across the page or the top and bottom of sentences are cut off.
Suggestions
You probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Vertical black lines when receiving. The sender's scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
Received color fax prints only in black & white.
Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages.
Replace the color ink cartridges that have reached the end of their life, and then ask the other person to send the color fax again.
(See Replacing the ink cartridges on page 65.)
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax in chapter 4 of the
Advanced User’s Guide.)
Telephone Line or Connections
Difficulty
Dialing does not work.
(No dial tone)
The machine does not answer when called.
Suggestions
Check that the machine is plugged in and that the On/Off key is on.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.
(Canada only) Change the Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)
Verify that the telephone line and jack are working by connecting a known working telephone and telephone line to the jack. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is no dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or jack.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode for your setup.
(See Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 35.) Check for a dial tone. If
possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line.
B
91
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Receiving Faxes
Difficulty
Cannot receive a fax.
Suggestions
Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook key. If you hear static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone company.
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as
the Brother machine. (See Choose the correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.
If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service,
please see Voice Mail on page 42.
If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,
please see Distinctive Ring on page 43.
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In
Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming faxes, you should select Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:
If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay
to 1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 38.)
If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your answering machine to 2.
If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.
Remember to reset your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.
If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.
92
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Receiving Faxes (continued)
Difficulty
Cannot receive a fax.
(continued)
Suggestions
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up
correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 45.)
1 Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your
Brother machine’s LINE jack.
2 Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT. jack, and then plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT. jack.
3 Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.
If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.
4 Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press l 5 1 and Start to send a fax.”
5 Set your answering machine to answer calls.
6
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Choose
the correct Receive Mode on page 35.)
Make sure your Brother machine’s Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy
Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered
the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 39.)
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See
Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 98.)
Sending Faxes
Difficulty
Cannot send a fax.
Transmission Verification Report says “RESULT:NG”.
Suggestions
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine.
Make sure that the FAX key is illuminated.
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error. (See Reports in
chapter 6 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If you send a PC FAX message and get “RESULT:NG” on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To gain extra memory, you can turn off Memory Receive (see Turning off Memory Receive operations in
chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s Guide), print fax messages in memory (see
Printing a fax from the memory in chapter 4 of the Advanced User’s Guide) or cancel
a Delayed Fax or Polling Job. (see Canceling a fax in progress on page 33 and
Checking and canceling waiting jobs in chapter 3 of the Advanced User’s Guide.) If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line, try changing the menu setting of Compatibility to Basic(for VoIP).
(See Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 98.)
93
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
B
Sending Faxes (continued)
Difficulty Suggestions
Sent faxes are blank.
Poor fax send quality.
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents on page 28.)
Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine's scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.
(See Cleaning the scanner on page 67.)
Vertical black lines when sending.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid
on the glass strip. Clean the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 67.)
Handling Incoming Calls
Difficulty
The machine “hears” a voice as a
CNG Tone.
Suggestions
If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off.
(See Easy Receive on page 39.)
Sending a fax call to the machine.
If you answered on an extension telephone, press your Fax Receive Code (the factory setting is l 5 1). If you answered on the external telephone (connected to the EXT. jack), press Start to receive the fax. When your machine answers, hang up.
Custom features on a single line.
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Voice Mail, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving faxes.
For example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother's ECM (Error
Correction Mode) feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, a separate telephone line with no custom features is recommended.
Copying Difficulties
Difficulty
Cannot make a copy.
Suggestions
Make sure that the COPY key is illuminated.
Poor copy results when using the
ADF.
Vertical black lines or streaks appear in copies.
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 29.)
Vertical black lines or streaks on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the scanner. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the white bar and
white plastic above them. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 67.)
Copies are blank.
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents on page 28.)
Fit to Page does not work properly. Make sure the document is not skewed on the scanner glass.
Reposition the document and try again.
94
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Scanning Difficulties
Difficulty
TWAIN or WIA errors appear when starting to scan. (Windows
®
)
TWAIN or ICA errors appear when starting to scan. (Macintosh)
Suggestions
Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is chosen as the primary source in your scanning application. For example, in PaperPort12SE with OCR, click File,
Scan or Get Photo and click Select to choose the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver.
Make sure the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source.
In PageManager, click File, Select Source and choose the Brother TWAIN driver.
Mac OS X 10.6.x users can also scan documents using the ICA Scanner Driver.
See Scanning a document using the ICA driver (Mac OS X 10.6.x) in the Software
User’s Guide.
Try using the scanner glass. (See Using the scanner glass on page 29.)
Poor scanning results when using the ADF.
OCR does not work.
Try increasing the scanner resolution.
(Macintosh users)
Make sure you have finished downloading and installing Presto! PageManager from: http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
Software Difficulties
Difficulty
Cannot install software or print.
“Device Busy”
Cannot print images from
FaceFilter Studio.
Suggestions
(Windows
®
users only)
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the Installation CD-ROM. This program will repair and reinstall the software.
Make sure the machine is not showing an error message on the LCD.
To use FaceFilter Studio, you must install the FaceFilter Studio application from the Installation CD-ROM supplied with your machine. To install FaceFilter Studio see the Quick Setup Guide.
Also, before you start FaceFilter Studio for the first time, you must make sure your
Brother machine is turned on and connected to your computer. This will allow you to access all the functions of FaceFilter Studio.
B
95
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™ Difficulties
Difficulty
Removable Disk does not work properly.
Cannot access Removable Disk from Desktop icon.
Part of my photo is missing when printed.
Suggestions
1 If you are using Windows
®
2000, have you installed the Windows
®
2000 update? If not, do the following:
1) Unplug the USB cable.
2) Install the Windows
®
2000 update using one of the following methods.
Install MFL-Pro Suite from the Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick
Setup Guide.)
Download the latest service pack from the Microsoft Web site.
3) Wait about 1 minute after you restart the PC, and then connect the USB cable.
2 Take out the memory card or USB Flash memory drive and put it back in again.
3 If you have tried “Eject” from within Windows
®
, take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive before you continue.
4 If an error message appears when you try to eject the memory card or USB
Flash memory drive, it means the card is being accessed. Wait a while and then try again.
5 If all of the above do not work, turn off your PC and machine, and then turn them on again. (You will have to unplug the power cord of the machine to turn it off.)
Make sure that you have correctly inserted the memory card or USB Flash memory drive.
Make sure that Borderless printing and Cropping are turned off. (See Borderless
printing and Cropping in chapter 8 of the Advanced User’s Guide.)
Network Difficulties
Difficulty
Cannot print over the network.
Suggestions
Make sure that your machine is powered on and is online and in Ready mode.
Print a Network Configuration list (see Reports in chapter 6 of the Advanced
User’s Guide.) and check the current Network settings printed in this list.
Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify that the cabling and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections are good, the machine shows
LAN Active for 2 seconds.
(If you are using a wireless connection or are having Network problems, see the
Network User’s Guide for more information.)
96
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Network Difficulties (continued)
Difficulty
The network scanning feature does not work.
The network PC-Fax Receive feature does not work.
The Brother software cannot be installed.
Cannot connect to wireless network.
Reset the network settings.
Suggestions
(Windows
®
users)
It is necessary to configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow
Network scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, enter the information below:
In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.
In Port number: Enter 54925.
In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
(Macintosh users)
Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in
Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the model list in ControlCenter2.
(Windows
®
users only)
It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX
Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:
In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
In Port number: Enter 54926.
In Protocol: UDP is selected.
Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
(Windows
®
users)
If the Security Software warning appears on the PC screen during the installation, change the Security Software settings to permit the Brother product setup program or other program to run.
(Macintosh users)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then install the Brother software.
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Press MENU, and then press a or b to display Print Reports. Press
Print Reports. Press a or b to display WLAN Report, and then press
WLAN Report.
For details, see the Network User’s Guide.
Press MENU, and then press a or b to display Network. Press Network. Press a or b to display Network Reset, and then press Network Reset.
For details, see the Network User’s Guide.
Touchscreen Difficulties
Difficulty
The dial pad does not work when entering numbers or characters.
Suggestions
Use the touchscreen buttons to enter information.
B
97
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dial Tone
Setting the dial tone to Detection will shorten the dial detect pause.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
c
Press Initial Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Dial Tone.
e
Press Dial Tone.
f
Press Detection or No Detection.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
B
Telephone line interference / VoIP
If you are having problems sending or receiving a fax due to possible interference on the telephone line, we recommend that you change the modem speed to minimize errors in fax operations.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
c
Press Initial Setup.
d
Press a or b to display
Compatibility.
e
Press Compatibility.
f
Press High, Normal or
Basic(for VoIP).
Basic(for VoIP) reduces the modem speed to 9,600 bps and turns off color fax receiving and
ECM, except for color fax sending.
Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use it only when needed.
To improve compatibility with most
VoIP services, Brother recommends changing the compatibility setting to
Basic(for VoIP).
Normal sets the modem speed at
14,400 bps.
High increases the modem speed to
33,600 bps. (factory setting) g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
VoIP (Voice over IP) is a type of phone system that uses an internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line.
B
98
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Machine Information
Checking the serial number
You can see the machine’s serial number on the LCD.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Machine Info.
c
Press Machine Info.
d
Press Stop/Exit.
B
Reset functions
The following reset functions are available:
1 Network
You can reset the print server back to its default factory settings, such as the password and IP address information.
2 Speed Dial&Fax
Speed Dial & Fax resets the following settings:
Speed Dial
(Speed-Dial and Setup Groups)
Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Polled Transmit, Delayed Fax and
Delayed Batch Transmission)
Station ID
(Name and Number)
Remote Fax Options
(Fax Forwarding and Paging)
Report settings
(Transmission Verification Report,
Quick Dial List and Fax Journal)
History
(Caller ID history and Outgoing Call)
Faxes in memory
B
B
Troubleshooting
3 All Settings
You can restore all settings to their factory defaults.
Brother strongly recommends you use this operation when you dispose of the machine.
Note
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network or All Settings.
How to reset the machine
B
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
c
Press Initial Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Reset.
e
Press Reset.
f
Press the type of reset you want to use.
g
Press Yes to confirm.
h
Press Yes for 2 seconds to reboot the machine.
B
99
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
C
Menu and features
On-screen programming
Your machine is designed to be easy to operate with LCD on-screen programming using the menu buttons on the Touchscreen.
User-friendly programming helps you take full advantage of all the menu selections your machine has to offer.
Since your programming is done on the LCD, we have created step-by-step on-screen instructions to help you program your machine. All you need to do is follow the instructions as they guide you through the menu selections and programming options.
C
C
100
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Menu table
The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
MENU (
)
Level1
General Setup
Level2
Mode Timer
Tray Setting
Level3
—
Tray#1
Options
Off
0 Sec
30 Secs
1 Min
2 Mins*
5 Mins
Paper Size
(Options)
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A5
A3
EXE
4"x6"
Paper Type
(Options)
Plain Paper*
Inkjet Paper
Brother BP71
Brother BP61
Other Glossy
Transparency
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Sets the length of time before the machine will return to FAX mode and before the machine will change from a restricted user to Public user mode when using Secure
Function Lock.
Sets the size of paper in the paper tray #1.
Sets the type of paper in the paper tray #1.
Page
See
1
.
C
C
101
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
General Setup
(Continued)
Level2
Tray Setting
(Continued)
Volume
Auto Daylight
Level3
Tray#2
A3
EXE
Tray Use:Copy Tray#1
Tray#2
Auto Select*
Tray Use:Fax
Tray#1
Ring
Beeper
Speaker
High
Off
Low*
Med
High
Off
Tray#2
Auto Select*
Off
Low
Med*
—
Low
Med*
High
On
Off*
Options
Paper Size
(Options)
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
Descriptions
Sets the size of paper in the paper tray #2.
Choose the tray that will be used for COPY mode.
Choose the tray that will be used for FAX mode.
Adjusts the ring volume.
Adjusts the beeper volume.
Adjusts the speaker volume.
Page
See
1
.
LCD Settings Backlight
Dim Timer
Light*
Med
Dark
Off
10 Secs
20 Secs
30 Secs*
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Change this setting to On if you want the machine to change automatically for
Daylight Saving Time.
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
You can set how long the
LCD backlight stays on after the last key press.
102
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
General Setup
(Continued)
Level2
Sleep Mode
Level3
—
LGR - Short Grain —
Function Lock Set Password
—
Lock OffiOn
—
Setup User
—
Options
1 Min
2 Mins
3 Mins
5 Mins*
10 Mins
30 Mins
60 Mins
On
Off*
Fax Setup Receive Ring Delay
2
3
0
1
4*
F/T Ring Time 20 Secs*
30 Secs
40 Secs
70 Secs
Easy Receive On*
Off
Remote Codes On*
(l51, #51)
Off
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can choose how long the machine must be idle before it goes into Sleep mode.
Turn on this setting when you use Ledger short grain paper.
You can restrict selected machine operation for up to 10 restricted users and for all other nonauthorized Public users.
Sets the number of rings before the machine answers in Fax Only or
Fax/Tel mode.
Sets the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in Fax/Tel mode.
Page
See
See
Receives fax messages automatically when you answer a call and hear fax tones.
Allows you to answer all calls at an extension telephone and use codes to turn the machine on or off. You can personalize these codes.
1
.
1
.
C
103
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
Fax
(Continued)
Level2
Setup Receive
(Continued)
Fax Preview
On
Off*
Report Setting Transmission
On
On+Image
Off*
Off+Image
Off2
Off2+Image
Journal Period
Off
Every 50 Faxes*
Every 6 Hours
Every 12 Hours
Every 24 Hours
Every 2 Days
Every 7 Days
Print Fax
Remote Access
Level3 Options
Auto Reduction On*
Off
Memory Receive Off*
Fax Forward
Paging
Fax Storage
PC Fax Receive
Descriptions
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
You can set the machine to either forward fax messages, call your pager, store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine), or send faxes to your PC.
If you choose Fax Forward or PC-Fax Receive, you can turn on the safety feature Backup Print.
You can preview received faxes.
Page
See
1
.
—
—
Remaining Jobs —
—
---
—
Choose the initial setup for
Transmission Verification
Report.
Sets the interval for the automatic printing of the
Fax Journal.
If you have chosen other than Off and
Every 50 Faxes, you can set the time for the chosen option.
If you have chosen
Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the week.
Prints incoming faxes stored in the memory.
Set your own code for
Remote Retrieval.
Check which jobs are in the memory and cancel chosen jobs.
See
1
.
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
104
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
Fax
(Continued)
Level2 Level3 Options
Miscellaneous Distinctive Off*
Set (On)
Area Code
(USA only)
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Uses the telephone company's Distinctive
Ring subscriber service to register the ring pattern with the machine.
Set up your 3-digit area code only if you do not dial it within your own area code.
Page
See
1
.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
105
C
Network menu
Level1
Network
Level2
Wired LAN
Level3
TCP/IP
Level4
BOOT Method
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
WINS Config
WINS Server
DNS Server
APIPA
Options
Auto*
Static
RARP
Descriptions
Choose the
BOOT method that best suits your needs.
BOOTP
DHCP
[000-255].
Enter the IP address.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
Enter the Subnet mask.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the
Gateway address.
[000-255]
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX
Enter the Node name.
Auto*
Static
Chooses the
WINS configuration mode.
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
On*
Off
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary server.
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary server.
Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
106
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
Network
(Continued)
Level2
Wired LAN
(Continued)
WLAN
Level3
TCP/IP
(Continued)
Ethernet
TCP/IP
Level4
IPv6
—
MAC Address
—
BOOT Method
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
WINS Config
Options
On
Off*
Auto*
Descriptions
Enable or disable the IPv6 protocol.
If you want to use the IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.
brother.com/ for more information.
Chooses the
Ethernet link mode.
100B-FD
100B-HD
10B-FD
10B-HD
—
Auto*
Static
RARP
You can see your machine’s MAC address.
Chooses the
BOOT method that best suits your needs.
BOOTP
DHCP
[000-255].
Enter the IP address.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
Enter the Subnet mask.
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255]
[000-255].
[000-255].
[000-255].
Enter the
Gateway address.
[000-255]
BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX
Enter the Node name.
Auto*
Static
Chooses the
WINS configuration mode.
C
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
107
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
Network
(Continued)
Level2
WLAN
(Continued)
Level3
TCP/IP
(Continued)
Setup Wizard
WPS/AOSS
Level4
WINS Server
DNS Server
APIPA
IPv6
—
—
WPS w/PIN Code —
Options
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
(Primary)
000.000.000.000
(Secondary)
000.000.000.000
On*
Off
On
Off*
—
—
—
Descriptions
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server.
Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary DNS server.
Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.
Enable or disable
IPv6 protocol for a wireless LAN.
If you want to use the IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.
brother.com/ for more information.
You can manually configure your print server for a wireless network.
You can easily configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
You can easily configure your wireless network settings using
WPS with a PIN code.
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
108
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
Network
(Continued)
Level2
WLAN
(Continued)
E-mail/IFAX
(Available after
IFAX is downloaded)
Level3
WLAN Status
MAC Address
Level4
Status
Signal
SSID
Comm. Mode
—
Mail Address
—
Options
—
—
—
—
—
—
Setup Server SMTP Server
Name
(Up to 30 characters)
IP Address
[000-255].
[000
-
255].
[000
-
255].
[000
-
255]
[00001-65535]
SMTP Port
Auth. for SMTP None*
SMTP-AUTH
POP bef. SMTP
POP3 Server
Name
(Up to 30 characters)
POP3 Port
IP Address
[000-255].
[000
-
255].
[000
-
255].
[000
-
255]
[00001-65535]
Mailbox Name
—
Enter the SMTP port number.
Selects the
Security method for E-mail notification.
Enter the POP3 server address.
Enter the POP3 port number.
Enter the mail box name. (Up to
20 characters)
Descriptions
You can see the current wireless network status.
You can see the current wireless network signal strength.
You can see the current SSID.
You can see the current
Communication
Mode.
You can see your machine’s MAC address.
Enter the mail address. (Up to
60 characters)
Enter the SMTP server address.
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
109
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
Network
(Continued)
Level2
E-mail/IFAX
(Available after
IFAX is downloaded)
(Continued)
Level3
Setup Server
(Continued)
Level4
Mailbox Pwd
Options
—
Descriptions
Enter the password to login to the POP3 server. (Up to
20 characters)
APOP
Setup Mail RX Auto Polling On*
Poll Frequency
(Available when
Auto Polling is set to On.)
Header
1 Min
3 Mins
5 Mins
10 Mins*
30 Mins
60 Mins
All
Subject+From+
To
None*
Del Error Mail On*
Off
Notification
On
MDN
Off*
Setup Mail TX Sender Subject —
Size Limit
On
Off*
Off
On
Off*
Notification
On
Off*
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Enables or disables APOP.
Automatically checks the POP3 server for new messages.
Sets the interval for checking for new messages on the POP3 server.
Selects the contents of the mail header to be printed.
Deletes error mails automatically.
Receives notification messages.
Displays the subject that is attached to the
Internet Fax data.
Limits the size of
E-mail documents.
Sends notification messages.
110
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
Network
(Continued)
Level2
E-mail/IFAX
(Available after
IFAX is downloaded)
(Continued)
Level3
Setup Relay
Level4 Options
Rly Broadcast On
Off*
Time Zone
—
Relay Domain
—
Relay Report
On
Off*
UTCXXX:XX
—
Network I/F
—
LDAP
—
Wired LAN*
WLAN
On
Off*
—
—
Network Reset
— —
See Network User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
—
Menu and features
Descriptions
Relays a document to another fax machine over the
Internet.
Registers the
Domain name.
Prints the Relay
Broadcast
Report.
Sets the time zone for your country.
You can choose the network connection type.
Allows you to search for information such as fax numbers and E-mail addresses on your server.
Restore all network settings to factory default.
111
C
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
MENU (
) (continued)
Level1 Level2
Print Reports Transmission
Machine Info.
Initial Setup
Help List
Quick Dial
Fax Journal
Receive Mode
Date&Time
Station ID
Tone/Pulse
(Canada only)
Dial Tone
Dial Prefix
Compatibility
Level3
—
—
—
—
User Settings
—
Network Config —
WLAN Report
—
Caller ID hist. —
Serial No.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
—
—
Alphabetical
Order
—
—
—
Numerical Order
—
—
—
Descriptions
Prints these lists and reports.
Page
See
Lets you check the serial number of your machine.
Choose the Receive Mode that best suits your needs.
1
.
Fax Only*
Fax/Tel
External TAD
Manual
—
Fax:
Name:
Puts the date and time on the LCD and in headings of faxes you send.
Enter your name and fax number to appear on each page you fax.
Choose the dialing mode.
See
2
.
Tone*
Pulse
Detection
No Detection*
On
Off*
High*
Normal
Basic(for VoIP)
1
2
See Advanced User’s Guide.
See Quick Setup Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
You can shorten the dial tone detect pause.
Sets a prefix number that will always be added before the fax number every time you dial.
Adjusts the modem speed to help resolve transmission problems.
See
1
.
112
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
Initial Setup
(Continued)
Level2
Reset
Level3
Network
Speed Dial&Fax
All Settings
Options
—
—
—
Local Language
(USA only)
—
English*
Spanish
Local Language
(Canada only)
—
English*
French
1
2
See Advanced User’s Guide.
See Quick Setup Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Resets the print server back to its factory default settings, such as the password and IP address information.
Deletes all stored
Speed Dial numbers and faxes, restores the Station
ID, Quick Dial List,
Transmission Verification
Report and Fax Journal back to the factory default settings.
Resets all the machine’s settings back to the settings that were set at the factory.
Allows you to change the
LCD language for your country.
Allows you to change the
LCD language for your country.
Page
See
2
.
113
C
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
FAX ( )
Level1
Call History
Level2 Level3
Outgoing Call
Send a fax
More
Caller ID hist. Send a fax
More
Options
—
Add to Speed
Dial
Add to One
Touch Dial
Delete
—
Add to Speed
Dial
Add to One
Touch Dial
Delete
—
Descriptions
You can choose a number from the Outgoing Call history and then make a telephone call to it, send a fax to it, add it to Speed Dial, add it to One Touch Dial, or delete it.
You can choose a number from the Caller ID history and then send a fax to it, add it to
Speed Dial, add it to
One Touch Dial, or delete it.
Page
See
1
.
Phone Book Send a fax
More
—
Set Speed Dial
Set One Touch
Dial
Setup Groups
Change
Delete
—
—
—
—
—
You can dial by pressing only a few keys (and Start).
You can store Speed Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing only a few buttons on the Touchscreen (and
Start).
You can store One Touch
Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing only a few keys (and Start).
You can set up Group numbers for Broadcasting.
You can change One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
You can delete One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
Sets the resolution for outgoing faxes.
See
1
.
See
1
.
Fax Resolution
—
Duplex Fax
Contrast
—
Standard*
—
—
—
—
Fine
S.Fine
Photo
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Auto*
Light
Dark
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
You can choose duplex fax
SCAN mode.
Changes the lightness or darkness of faxes you send.
114
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
Glass Scan Size —
Volume
(Appears after pressing Hook)
Broadcasting
Preview
Delayed Fax
Batch TX
Real Time TX
Polled TX
Polling RX
Overseas Mode
Factory Reset
Level2
—
Add Number
Phone Book
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Set New Default —
—
Level3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Options
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A3
Off
Low
Med*
High
—
Descriptions
To fax a Legal, Ledger, A3 or
A4 size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
Adjusts the volume level of the speaker.
On
Off*
On
Off*
On
Off*
You can send the same fax message to more than one fax number.
You can preview a fax message before send it.
Sets the time of day in
24-hour format that the delayed faxes will be sent.
Combines delayed faxes to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission.
You can send a fax without using the memory.
On
Off*
On
Off*
On
Off*
On
Off*
Fax Resolution
Contrast
Glass Scan Size
Real Time TX
Preview
—
Sets up your machine with a document to be retrieved by another fax machine.
Sets up your machine to poll another fax machine.
If you are having difficulty sending faxes overseas, set this to On.
You can save your fax settings.
You can restore all settings to the factory settings.
Page
See
See
1
.
1
.
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
115
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SCAN ( )
Level1 to File
to Media
(when a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive is inserted)
Option1
—
Option2
—
Option3
—
Descriptions
You can scan a black & white or a color document into your computer.
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
Page
See
1
.
Duplex Scan
Duplex Scan
Quality
File Type
—
—
—
—
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Color 100 dpi
Color 200 dpi*
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
B/W 100 dpi
B/W 200 dpi
B/W 300 dpi
(If you choose color option in
Quality setting)
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.
PDF*
JPEG
(If you choose
B&W option in
Quality setting)
TIFF
PDF*
1
2
3
See Software User’s Guide.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
116
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
to Media
(when a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive is inserted)
(Continued)
to Network
to FTP
to Email
Option1 Option2
Glass Scan Size
—
File Name
Auto Crop
—
—
Option3
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A3
—
On
Off*
Descriptions
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4 size document, you'll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
You can rename the file.
Scan multiple documents placed on the scanner glass to a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive one at a time.
You can save your scan settings as the default settings.
Page
See
2
.
See
2
.
Set New Default
—
Quality
File Type
Glass Scan
Size
Auto Crop
—
Factory Reset
(Profile Name)
(Profile Name)
PC
E-mail server
(Available after
IFAX is downloaded)
—
—
—
—
Manual
Phone Book
—
—
—
—
You can restore all settings to the original factory default settings.
You can send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet.
You can send scanned data via FTP.
You can scan a black & white or a color document into your
E-mail application.
You can scan a black & white or a color document into your
E-mail Server.
Manual: You can enter an
E
mail address using the buttons on the LCD.
See
1
.
Phone Book: You can search for an E
mail address that you have stored in the machine.
1
2
See Software User’s Guide.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
3
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
117
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1 to Email
(Continued)
Option1
E-mail server
(Available after
IFAX is downloaded)
(Continued)
Option2
Manual
Phone Book
(Continued)
Option3
Duplex Scan
(Options)
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
Quality
(Options)
Descriptions
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
Page
See
1
.
Chooses the file format to send the scanned data via
E-mail server.
Color 100 dpi
Color 200 dpi*
Color 300 dpi
Color 600 dpi
B/W 100 dpi
B/W 200 dpi
B/W 300 dpi
File Type
(Options)
(If you choose color option in
Quality setting)
PDF*
JPEG
(If you choose
B&W option in
Quality setting)
TIFF
PDF*
1
See Software User’s Guide.
2
3
See Advanced User’s Guide.
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
118
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1 to Email
(Continued)
to OCR
3
to Image
Option1
E-mail server
(Available after
IFAX is downloaded)
(Continued)
Option2
Manual
Phone Book
(Continued)
Option3
Glass Scan Size
(Options)
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A3
Set New Default
(Options)
Descriptions
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4 size document, you’ll need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting.
You can save your scan settings.
Page
See
1
.
—
Duplex Scan
—
Duplex Scan
—
—
—
—
Quality
File Type
Glass Scan Size
Factory Reset You can restore all settings to the factory settings.
— You can have your text document converted to an editable text file.
Off*
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
—
Off*
DuplexScan :
LongEdge
You can scan a color picture into your graphics application.
You can choose the duplex
SCAN mode.
DuplexScan :
ShortEdge
1
2
3
See Software User’s Guide.
See Advanced User’s Guide.
(Macintosh users)
This function is available after you have downloaded and installed Presto! PageManager from http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
119
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
COPY ( )
Level1
Quality
Paper Type
Paper Size
Tray Select
Level2
—
—
—
—
Level3
—
—
—
—
Options
Fast
Normal*
Best
Plain Paper*
Inkjet Paper
Brother BP71
Brother BP61
Other Glossy
Transparency
Letter*
Legal
Ledger
A4
A5 (tray #1 only)
A3
EXE
4"x6"
(tray #1 only)
Tray#1
Tray#2
Auto Select*
—
Enlarge/Reduce 100%*
—
Enlarge
Reduce
—
—
198% 4"x6"iA4
186% 4"x6"iLTR
130% LTRiLGR
104% EXEiLTR
97% LTRiA4
93% A4iLTR
85% LTRiEXE
83% LGLiA4
78% LGLiLTR
64% LGRiLTR
46% LTRi4"x6"
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Choose the Copy resolution for the next copy.
Choose the paper type that matches the paper in the tray.
Choose the paper size that matches the paper in the tray.
Choose the tray that will be used for COPY mode.
—
You can choose the enlargement ratio for the next copy.
You can choose the reduction ratio for the next copy.
Page
See
See
1
.
1
.
120
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Level1
Enlarge/Reduce
(Continued)
Density
Level2
Fit to Page
—
Level3
—
Custom(25-400%) —
—
Options
—
—
Light Dark
Descriptions
Your machine will adjust the size automatically to the paper size you set.
You can enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Adjusts the density of copies.
Page
See
1
.
0
+1
-2
-1
Stack/Sort
Page Layout
—
—
Skew Adjustment —
—
Off(1in1)*
2in1(P)
2in1(L)
2 in 1 (ID)
4in1(P)
4in1(L)
1 to 2
Poster (2 x 1)
Poster (2 x 2)
Poster (3 x 3)
—
+2
Stack*
Sort
If you choose
Ledger or A3:
(When 2 in 1 is chosen)
LGRx2 i LGRx1
LTRx2 i LGRx1
A3x2 i A3x1
A4x2 i A3x1
(When poster 2x2 is chosen)
LGRx1 i LGRx4
LTRx1 i LGRx4
A3x1 i A3x4
A4x1 i A3x4
Auto*
Off
You can choose to stack or sort multiple copies.
You can make N in 1, 2 in 1
ID, or Poster copies.
If your scanned copy is skewed, your machine can correct the data automatically.
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
C
121
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
Duplex Copy
Level2
—
More
Level3
—
Advanced
Options
Off*
2sidei2side
1sidei2side
LongEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
LongEdgeFlip
1sidei2side
ShortEdgeFlip
2sidei1side
ShortEdgeFlip
Normal*
Advanced Settings
Favorite Settings
—
Store
Rename
A3/LGR Duplex
Copy Setting
—
—
DX1
DX2
Fit to Page*
Keep Scale
Off*
Ink Save Mode
Thin Paper Copy
Book Copy
Watermark Copy
Favorite:1
Favorite:2
Favorite:3
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can choose the duplex print settings.
You can choose various settings for copy such as
Book Copy and
Watermark Copy.
You can save your Favorite settings.
Page
See
1
.
122
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Watermark Copy Settings
Option1
Edit Template
Option2
Text
Position
Size
Angle
Option3
—
Transparency
Color
+45
+90
-2
-1
0*
+1
+2
Black*
Green
Blue
Purple
Red
Orange
Yellow
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
B
C
Option4
CONFIDENTIAL*
DRAFT
COPY
A
F
G
D
E*
H
I
Pattern
Small
Medium*
Large
-90
-45*
0
Descriptions
Uses a template to place text into your document as a Watermark.
Page
See
1
.
C
123
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Option1
Use Image
Option2
Scan
(Set watermark document and press Start.)
Media
(Select image from media)
Option3
Transparency
Position
Size
Angle
Transparency
Pattern
Small
Medium*
Large
-90
-45*
0
+45
+90
-2
-1
0*
+1
+2
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
H
I
F
G
B
C
D
E*
+1
+2
A
Option4
-2
-1
0*
Descriptions
You can choose the level of transparency of the watermark as you scan it from a paper document.
Places a logo or text into your document as a
Watermark using an image from removable media.
Page
See
1
.
124
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
PHOTO CAPTURE (
Level1
View Photo(s)
Level2
)
(Print All Photos)
Level3
(Auto Correct)
Options
See the print settings in the following table.
(Slide Show)
Enhance Photo Enhance
(Auto Correct)
See the print settings in the following table.
Descriptions
You can print all photos in your memory card or USB
Flash memory drive.
The machine starts a Slide
Show of your photos.
The machine decides the appropriate effect for your photo.
You can adjust your photos with these settings.
Page
See
1
.
(Enhance Skin)
(Enhance Scenery)
(Remove Red-Eye)
(Night Scene)
(Fill Light)
(Whiteboard)
(Monochrome)
(Sepia)
(Auto Correct &
Remove Red-Eye)
—
Trim
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
You can trim your photo and print a part of the image.
C
125
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Level1
Index Print
Level2
Index Sheet
Level3
6 Images/Line*
5 Images/Line
Print Photos
—
Options
See the print settings in the following table.
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can print a thumbnail page.
You can print an individual image.
Page
See
1
.
Print Settings
Option1
Print Quality
(Does not appear when DPOF Print is chosen.)
Paper Type
Paper Size
Option2
Normal
Photo*
Plain Paper
Inkjet Paper
Brother BP71
Brother BP61
Other Glossy*
4"x 6"*
5"x 7"
Letter
Ledger
A4
A3
Option3
—
—
(When A4 or
Letter is chosen)
3"x 4"
3.5"x 5"
4"x 6"
5"x 7"
6"x 8"
Max. Size*
—
Option4
—
—
—
Brightness
(Does not appear when Enhance is chosen.)
Dark
Light
—
0
+1
-2
-1
+2
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
Choose the print quality.
Page
See
1
.
Choose the paper type.
Choose the paper and print size.
Adjusts the brightness.
126
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Option1
Contrast
(Does not appear when Enhance is chosen.)
Option2
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
True2Life
(Does not appear when Enhance is chosen.)
On
Off*
Option3
—
White Balance
Sharpness
Color Density
Option4
—
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
0
+1
+2
-2
-1
Descriptions
Adjusts the contrast.
Adjusts the hue of the white areas.
Enhances the detail of the image.
Adjusts the total amount of color in the image.
Cropping On*
Off
— —
Borderless
Print Date
(Does not appear when DPOF Print is chosen.)
On*
Off
On
Off*
—
—
—
—
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Crops the image around the margin to fit the paper size or print size. Turn this feature off if you want to print whole images or prevent unwanted cropping.
Expands the printable area to fit the edges of the paper.
Prints the date on your photo.
Page
See
1
.
C
127
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Option1 Option2
Set New Default Print Quality
Paper Type
Paper Size
Brightness
Contrast
True2Life
Cropping
Borderless
Print Date
Factory Reset
—
Option3
—
—
Option4
—
—
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can save your print settings.
You can restore all the settings to factory settings.
Page
See
1
.
Phone Book (
Level1
Phone Book
)
Level2
Send a fax
More
Level3
—
Options
—
Set Speed Dial
—
Set One Touch
Dial
—
Setup Groups
—
Change
Delete
—
—
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can dial by pressing only a few keys (and Start).
You can set up Speed Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing only a few buttons on the Touchscreen (and
Start).
You can store your most frequently called numbers on the One Touch keys.
You can set up Group numbers for Broadcasting.
You can change
One Touch Dial and
Speed Dial numbers.
You can delete One Touch
Dial and Speed Dial numbers.
Page
See
1
.
128
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Menu and features
Call History (
)
Level1
Call History
Level2
Outgoing Call
Level3
Send a fax
More
Options
—
Add to Speed
Dial
Add to One
Touch Dial
Caller ID hist. Send a fax
More
Delete
—
Add to Speed
Dial
Add to One
Touch Dial
Delete
1
See Advanced User’s Guide.
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can choose a number from the Outgoing Call history and then make a telephone call to it, send a fax to it, add it to One Touch
Dial, add it to Speed Dial, or delete it.
You can choose a number from the Caller ID history and then send a fax to it, add it to One Touch Dial, add it to Speed Dial, or delete it.
Page
See
1
.
Fax Preview ( )
Level1
Fax Preview
Level2
—
Level3
—
Options
On
Off*
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.
Descriptions
You can view faxes you receive on the LCD screen.
Page
C
129
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Entering Text
When you are setting certain menu selections, you may need to enter text into the machine.
Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. Up to four letters are assigned to each letter button on the LCD. By pressing the proper button repeatedly, you can access the character you want.
C
Inserting spaces
To enter a space, press to choose special characters, then press the space button or .
Note
The characters available may differ depending on your country.
Making corrections
If you entered an incorrect character and want to change it, use the arrow buttons to move the cursor under the incorrect character. Then press . Re-enter the correct character. You can also insert letters by moving the cursor and entering a character.
C
Repeating letters
If you need to enter a character that is on the same button as the letter before it, press c to move the cursor to the right before you press the same button again.
C
C
130
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
D
Specifications
General
Note
This chapter provides a summary of the machines’ specifications. For additional specifications visit http://www.brother.com/ for details.
Printer Type
Print Method
Memory Capacity
LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display)
Power Source
Inkjet
Black:
Color:
192 MB
Piezo with 210
1 nozzle
Piezo with 210
AC 100 to 120 V 50/60 Hz
Copy Mode:
Ready Mode:
Sleep Mode:
Off:
Approx. 8 W
Approx. 4 W
Approx. 0.3 W
3 nozzles
Touchscreen 3.3 in. (82.8 mm) TFT Color LCD
1
2
3
Measured diagonally.
Measured when the machine is connected to the USB interface.
When using ADF, single-side printing and scanning, resolution: standard / document: ISO/IEC 24712 printed pattern.
D
D
131
D
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dimensions
13 in.
(331 mm)
21.3 in.
(540 mm)
23.2 in.
(590 mm)
19.3 in.
(489 mm)
26.3 in.
(669 mm)
Weight
Noise
Temperature
Humidity
ADF (automatic document feeder)
Document Size
40.8 lb (18.5 kg)
Operating:
Operating:
Best Print Quality:
Operating:
Best Print Quality:
Up to 35 pages
50 to 95
F (10 to 35 C)
68 to 91
F (20 to 33 C)
20 to 80% (without condensation)
20 to 80% (without condensation)
Paper: 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) Letter or A4 size
ADF Width: 5.8 in. to 11.7 in. (148 mm to 297 mm)
ADF Length: 5.8 in. to 17 in. (148 mm to 431.8 mm)
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 17 in. (431.8 mm)
1
Noise depends on printing conditions.
132
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
Print media
Paper Input Paper Tray #1
Paper Type:
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper (coated paper),
Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS B5,
Envelopes (commercial No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4), Photo 4"
6",
Photo L 3.5"
5", Photo 2L 5" 7", Index Card and PostCard
Width: 3.5 in. - 11.7 in. (89 mm - 297 mm)
Length: 5.0 in. - 17.0 in. (127 mm - 431.8 mm)
For more details, see Paper weight and thickness on page 27.
Maximum paper tray capacity:
Approx. 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) plain paper
Paper Tray #2
Paper Type:
Plain Paper
Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal, Executive, A4, JIS B4, JIS B5
Width: 7.2 in. - 11.7 in. (182 mm - 297 mm)
Length: 10.1 in. - 17.0 in. (257 mm - 431.8 mm)
For more details, see Paper weight and thickness on page 27.
Maximum paper tray capacity:
Approx. 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) plain paper
2
3
1
For glossy paper or transparencies, remove printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid smudging.
Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
D
D
133
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Input
(Continued)
Paper Output
Manual Feed Slot
Paper Type:
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper (coated paper), Glossy Paper
,
Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger, A3, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS B5,
Envelopes (commercial No.10, DL, C5, Monarch, Y4), Photo 4"
6",
Photo L 3.5"
5", Photo 2L 5" 7", Index Card and PostCard
Width: 3.5 in. - 11.7 in. (89 mm - 297 mm)
Length: 5.0 in. - 17.0 in. (127 mm - 431.8 mm)
For more details, see Paper weight and thickness on page 27.
Maximum paper tray capacity:
1 sheet of special print media
Up to 50 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m
2
) plain paper (face up print delivery to the output paper tray)
2
3
1
For glossy paper or transparencies, remove printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid smudging.
Use only transparencies recommended for inkjet printing.
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
134
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
Fax
D
Compatibility
Duplex Fax Send (2-sided)
Modem Speed
ITU-T Super Group 3
Yes. Up to Legal size document (ADF)
Automatic Fallback
33,600 bps
11.3 in. (288 mm) (A3) Scanning Width
(Single-sided document)
Scanning Width and Length
(Duplex (2-sided) document)
Printing Width
Gray Scale
Resolution
One Touch Dial
Speed Dial
Groups
Broadcasting
Automatic Redial
Memory Transmission
Out of Paper Reception
Width: 8.2 in. (208 mm) (Letter/Legal/A4) (ADF)
Length: 13.8 in. (349.6 mm) (ADF)
11.5 in. (291 mm) (A3)
Levels: 64 (B&W) / 256 (Color)
Standard
203
98 dpi (Black)
203
196 dpi (Color)
Fine
203
196 dpi (Black/Color)
Superfine
203
392 dpi (Black)
Photo
203
196 dpi (Black)
16 (8
2)
100 stations
2 numbers
Up to 6
266 (200 Speed Dial/16 One Touch Dial/ 50 Manual Dial)
1 time after 5 minutes
1
“Pages” refers to the “ITU-T Test Chart #1” (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, MMR code). Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.
D
135
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Copy
Color/Black
Copy Width
Multiple Copies
Enlarge/Reduce
Resolution
Duplex (2-sided)
Yes/Yes
Max. 11.46 in. (291 mm)
Stacks/Sorts up to 99 pages
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)
Prints up to 1200
1200 dpi
Yes. Up to Legal size document (ADF)
Paper Type:
Plain paper
Paper Size:
Letter, Ledger
1
2
Manual duplex is available for Ledger and A3 documents using the scanner glass.
Minimum top and bottom margins of 0.87 in. (22 mm)
D
136
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
PhotoCapture Center™
D
Compatible Media
Memory Stick™ (16 MB - 128 MB)
Memory Stick PRO™ (256 MB - 32 GB)
(Not available for music data with MagicGate™)
Memory Stick Duo™ (16 MB - 128 MB)
Memory Stick PRO Duo™ (256 MB - 32 GB)
Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) with Adapter
MultiMedia Card (32 MB - 2 GB)
MultiMedia Card plus (128 MB - 4 GB)
MultiMedia Card mobile with Adapter (64 MB - 1 GB)
SD (16 MB to 2 GB) miniSD with Adapter microSD with Adapter
SDHC (4 GB to 32 GB) miniSDHC with Adapter microSDHC with Adapter
Up to 1200
2400 dpi
Resolution
File Extension
(Media Format)
(Image Format)
Color Enhancement
Photo Enhance
Number of Files
Folder
Borderless
DPOF (ver. 1.0, ver. 1.1), Exif DCF (up to ver. 2.1)
Photo Print: JPEG
Scan to Media: JPEG, PDF (Color)
TIFF, PDF (Black & White)
True2Life™
Auto Correct, Enhance Skin, Enhance Scenery, Trimming,
Slide Show, Remove Red-eye, Night Scene, Fill Light,
Whiteboard, Monochrome and Sepia
Up to 999 files
(The folder inside memory cards or USB Flash memory drive is also counted.)
File must be stored in the 4th folder level of the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive.
Letter, A4, Ledger, A3, Photo 4"
3
4
5
1
2
Memory cards, adapters and USB Flash memory drive are not included.
USB 2.0 Standard
USB Mass Storage standard from 16 MB to 32 GB
Support format: FAT12/FAT16/FAT32
Progressive JPEG format is not supported.
Motion JPEG only
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
D
137
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PictBridge
Compatibility
Interface
Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association
PictBridge standard CIPA DC-001.
Visit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge/ for more information.
USB direct interface
D
138
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
Scanner
3
1
2
Color/Black
Duplex (2-sided)
TWAIN Compliant
WIA Compliant
ICA Compliant
Color Depth
Resolution
Scanning Width and Length
(Single-sided document)
Scanning Width and Length
(Duplex (2-sided) document)
Gray Scale
Yes/Yes
Yes. Up to Legal size document (ADF)
Yes (Windows
®
2000 Professional/Windows
®
XP/
Windows
®
XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista
®
/
Windows
®
7)
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x
Yes (Windows
®
XP
/Windows Vista
®
/Windows
®
7)
Yes (Mac OS X 10.6.x)
48 bit color Processing (Input)
24 bit color Processing (Output)
(Actual Input: 30 bit color/Actual Output: 24 bit color)
Up to 19200
19200 dpi (interpolated)
Up to 2400
2400 dpi (optical) (Scanner Glass)
Up to 2400
1200 dpi (optical) (Single-sided document from
ADF)
Up to 600
600 dpi (optical) (Duplex (2-sided) document from
ADF)
Width: Up to 11.46 in. (291 mm)
Length: Up to 16.77 in. (426 mm)
Width: Up to 8.3 in. (210 mm) (Letter/Legal/A4) (ADF)
Length: Up to 13.8 in. (349.6 mm) (ADF)
256 levels
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.
Windows
®
XP in this User’s Guide includes Windows
®
XP Home Edition, Windows
®
XP Professional, and Windows
®
XP Professional x64 Edition.
Maximum 1200
1200 dpi scanning when using the WIA Driver for Windows
®
XP, Windows Vista
®
and Windows
(resolution up to 19200
19200 dpi can be selected by using the Brother scanner utility).
®
7
D
D
139
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer
Resolution
Printing Width
Borderless
Duplex (2-sided)
Up to 1200
6000 dpi
10.76 in. [11 in. (borderless)
Letter, A4, Ledger, A3, A6, Photo 4"
6",
Index Card 5"
8"
Photo L 3.5"
5", Photo 2L 5" 7"
Paper Type:
Plain paper
Paper Size:
Letter, A4, Ledger
, Legal, A5, A6, Executive
1
2
3
4
5
When the Borderless feature is set to On.
See Paper type and size for each operation on page 26.
When printing on Ledger size paper.
Minimum top and bottom margins of 0.87 in. (22 mm)
For detailed specifications visit http://www.brother.com/.
D
140
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
Interfaces
USB
LAN
Wireless LAN
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2 m).
Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure/Ad-hoc Mode)
2
3
1
Your machine has a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a USB
1.1 interface.
Third party USB ports are not supported.
See Network (LAN) on page 144 and the Network User’s Guide for detailed network specifications.
D
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
141
D
Computer requirements
SUPPORTED OPERATING SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS
Computer Platform &
Operating System Version
Windows
®
Operating
System
Windows
®
2000
Professional
Windows
®
Windows
®
XP
Professional
Windows
®
XP
Windows Vista
Supported
PC Software
Functions
Printing,
PC Fax
,
Scanning,
Removable
Disk
PC
Interface
USB,
10/100
Base-TX
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11b/g/n
Processor
Minimum
Intel
®
Speed
Pentium
® or equivalent
II
Minimum
RAM
Recommended
RAM
Hard Disk Space to install
For
Drivers
For
Applications
64 MB 256 MB 150 MB 500 MB
128 MB
256 MB 512 MB
Macintosh
Operating
System
Windows
®
Mac OS X
Windows Server
®
2003
(print only via network)
Windows Server
®
2003 x64 Edition (print only via network)
Windows Server
®
2003
R2 (print only via network)
Windows Server
®
2003
R2 x64 Edition (print only via network)
Windows Server
®
2008
(print only via network)
Windows Server
®
2008
R2 (print only via network)
10.4.11, 10.5.x
Mac OS X 10.6.x
Printing
Printing,
PC Fax
,
Scanning,
Removable
Disk
10/100
Base-TX
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11b/g/n
10/100
Base-TX
(Ethernet),
Wireless
802.11b/g/n
1
2
3
4
Conditions:
5
6
7
Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
5.5 or greater.
For WIA, 1200
1200 resolution. Brother Scanner
Utility enables to enhance up to 19200
19200 dpi.
Third party USB ports are not supported.
PC Fax supports black and white only.
PaperPort™12SE supports Windows
Windows Vista
®
®
XP (SP3 or higher),
(SP2 or higher) and Windows
PaperPort™11SE supports Microsoft for Windows
®
®
7.
®
SP4 or higher
2000 (Available from the internet).
Removable disk is a function of PhotoCapture Center™.
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or
AMD64) supported CPU
Intel
®
Pentium
® or equivalent
4
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or AMD64) supported CPU
Intel
®
Pentium or equivalent
®
III
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or AMD64) supported CPU
Intel
®
Pentium
®
III or equivalent
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or AMD64) supported CPU
Intel
®
Pentium
®
4 or equivalent 64-bit
(Intel
®
64 or AMD64) supported CPU
64-bit (Intel
®
64 or
AMD64) supported CPU
PowerPC
®
G4/G5
Intel
®
Core™
Processor
Intel
®
Core™
Processor
512 MB 1 GB 500 MB 1.2 GB
1 GB
(32 bit)
2 GB
(64 bit)
1 GB
(32 bit)
2 GB
(64 bit)
650 MB
256 MB 512 MB 50 MB
512 MB
512 MB
1 GB
1 GB
2 GB
1 GB
2 GB
80 MB 400 MB
For the latest driver updates, visit us at
(in USA)
(in Canada) www.brother.com/ www.brother.ca/
N/A
All trademarks, brand and product names are the property of their respective companies.
D
142
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifications
Consumable items
Ink
Service Life of Ink
Cartridge
Replacement
Consumables
The machine uses individual Black, Yellow, Cyan and Magenta ink cartridges that are separate from the print head assembly.
Starter ink cartridges are in the box. The first time you install the ink cartridges the machine will use extra ink to fill the ink delivery tubes.
This is a one-time process that enables high quality printing.
Afterward, replacement ink cartridges will print the specified number of pages. Starter cartridge yield is approx. 65% of the yield of the LC75 replacement cartridges.
<Super High Yield Black> LC79BK
<Super High Yield Yellow> LC79Y
<Super High Yield Cyan> LC79C
<Super High Yield Magenta> LC79M
Black - Approximately 2,400 pages
Yellow, Cyan and Magenta - Approximately 1,200 pages
<High Yield Black> LC75BK
<High Yield Yellow> LC75Y
<High Yield Cyan> LC75C
<High Yield Magenta> LC75M
Black, Yellow, Cyan and Magenta - Approximately 600 pages
1
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 24711
For more information about the replacement consumables, visit us at www.brother.com/pageyield/.
What is Innobella™?
Innobella™ is a range of genuine consumables offered by Brother.
The name "Innobella™" derives from the words "Innovation" and
"Bella" (meaning "Beautiful" in Italian) and is a representation of the
"innovative" technology providing you with "beautiful" and "long lasting" print results.
When you print photo images, Brother recommends Innobella™ glossy photo paper (BP71 series) for high quality. Brilliant prints are made easier with Innobella™ Ink and paper.
D
D
143
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network (LAN)
Note
For details about the full Network specifications, see the Network User’s Guide.
LAN
Wireless Network
Security
Setup Support Utility
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,
Network Scanning, PC Fax Send, PC Fax Receive (Windows
®
only),
Remote Setup, and access photos from PhotoCapture Center™
Also included is Brother BRAdmin Light
software.
.
SSID (32 chr), WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (AES)
AOSS™
WPS
Yes
Yes
1
2
See the Computer Requirements chart on page 142.
If you require more advanced printer management, use the latest Brother BRAdmin Professional utility version that is available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.
D
144
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
E
Index
A
Accessories and supplies
ADF (automatic document feeder)
Answering machine (TAD)
connecting
............................................46
Apple Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
Automatic fax receive
............................................35
Easy Receive
.....................................39
B
Brother accessories and supplies
Brother numbers
...................................... i
CreativeCenter
........................................4
Customer Service
.................................... i
FAQs (frequently asked questions)
Notice - Disclaimer
................................. iv
product support
........................................ i
service centers
......................................... i
Solutions Center
...................................... i
C
Cleaning print head
..............................................68
scanner
.................................................67
Connecting external TAD
(answering machine)
,
external telephone
................................47
Consumable items
.................................143
Control panel overview
..............................6
ControlCenter
See Software User's Guide.
Copy paper size
.............................................55
paper type
.............................................55
tray use
.................................................22
using ADF
.............................................28
using scanner glass
..............................29
Cordless telephone (non-Brother)
Custom Ringing
.......................................43
Custom telephone features on a single line
...........................................................94
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
D
Data Ident-A-Call
..................................... 42
Dialing a pause
................................................ 50
manual
................................................. 49
One Touch
........................................... 49
Speed Dial
............................................ 49
Distinctive Ring
........................................ 43
setting ring pattern
............................... 44
turning off
............................................. 44
Document loading
............................................ 28
Duplex (2-sided)
Scan to Media
...................................... 61
E
Easy Receive
.......................................... 39
Envelopes
............................. 17
Error messages on LCD
B&W Print Only
.................................... 71
Cannot Detect
...................................... 72
Cannot Print
......................................... 72
Comm. Error
......................................... 72
Cover is Open
...................................... 72
Data Remaining
................................... 72
Document Jam
..................................... 72
DR Mode in Use
................................... 73
Ink Absorber Full
.................................. 73
Ink Absorber NearFull
Ink Low
................................................. 74
No Ink Cartridge
................................... 74
No Paper Fed
....................................... 75
Not Registered
............................... 49
Out of Memory
..................................... 76
Paper Jam
............................................ 76
Unable to Clean
................................... 77
Unable to Init.
....................................... 77
Unable to Print
..................................... 77
Unable to Scan
..................................... 77
Wrong Paper Size
................................ 78
Wrong Tray Setting
.............................. 78
Extension telephone, using
External telephone, connecting
E
145
F
Fax codes changing
...............................................48
Fax Receive Code
,
,
Telephone Answer Code
,
using
.....................................................48
Fax, from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Fax, stand-alone receiving
................................................35
difficulties
.................................... 91
,
Easy Receive
.....................................39
F/T Ring Time, setting
Fax Preview
................................ 39
,
from extension telephone
,
from external telephone
Ring Delay, setting
.............................38
telephone line interference / VoIP
tray use
..............................................23
sending
.................................................31
change scanner glass size
color fax
.............................................33
difficulties
...........................................93
Fax Preview
.......................................33
telephone line interference / VoIP
Transmission Verification Report
Fax/Tel mode answering at extension telephones
..................................... 47
,
Fax Receive Code
,
Ring Delay
............................................38
Telephone Answer Code
,
G
Gray scale
..................................... 135
H
Help
LCD messages
...................................100
Menu Table
.........................................101
Hook key
....................................................6
I
Ident-A-Call
............................................. 42
Ident-A-Ring
............................................ 42
Ink cartridges ink dot counter
...................................... 65
replacing
............................................... 65
Innobella™
............................................ 143
J
Jams document
.............................................. 80
paper
.................................................... 81
L
Labels
................................... 17
,
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
M
Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
Maintenance, routine replacing ink cartridges
Manual dialing
................................................... 49
receive
.................................................. 35
Manual feed slot
...................................... 17
Mode, entering
Copy
....................................................... 6
Fax
......................................................... 6
PhotoCapture
......................................... 6
Scan
....................................................... 6
Multi-line connections (PBX)
N
Network
Printing
See Network User's Guide.
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
146
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
O
One Touch changing
...............................................52
deleting
.................................................52
setting up
..............................................50
using
.....................................................49
P
Paper
...................................... 24
capacity
.................................................27
loading
..................................... 10
,
,
loading envelopes and postcards
printable area
........................................21
size
.......................................................22
size of document
...................................28
type
................................................ 22
,
PaperPort™12SE with OCR
See Software User's Guide. See also Help in the PaperPort™12SE application.
Personalized Ring
....................................43
PhotoCapture Center™ from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Memory Stick PRO™
............................57
Memory Stick™
....................................57
MultiMedia Card
....................................57
Preview photos
.....................................60
Print settings
Quality
................................................61
Printing all photos
...........................................60
Scan to Media change file name
...............................61
SD
.........................................................57
SDHC
....................................................57
Slide-Show
............................................60
specifications
......................................137
Presto! PageManager
See Software User's Guide. See also Help in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print difficulties
..............................................88
printable area
........................................21
resolution
............................................140
specifications
......................................140
Printing
See Software User's Guide.
Programming your machine
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Q
Quick Dial
................................................ 50
One Touch Dial changing
............................................ 52
deleting
.............................................. 52
setting up
........................................... 50
using
.................................................. 49
Pause
................................................... 50
Speed Dial changing
............................................ 52
deleting
.............................................. 52
setting up
........................................... 51
using
.................................................. 49
R
Receive Mode
External TAD
........................................ 35
Fax Only
............................................... 35
Fax/Tel
................................................. 35
Manual
................................................. 35
Redial/Pause
........................................... 50
Remote Setup
See Software User's Guide.
Resolution copy
.................................................... 136
fax
...................................................... 135
.................................................... 140
scan
.................................................... 139
Ring Delay, setting
.................................. 38
RingMaster
.............................................. 43
S
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
Serial Number
how to find ...............See inside front cover
SimpleBiz Fax & Alternative Number
Ringing
.................................................... 42
Smart Ring
.............................................. 43
Speed Dial changing
............................................... 52
deleting
................................................. 52
setting up
.............................................. 51
using
..................................................... 49
E
147
T
TAD (telephone answering device), external
............................................. 35
,
connecting
...................................... 45
,
Receive Mode
.......................................35
recording OGM
.....................................46
Teen Ring
................................................42
Telephone line connections
...........................................46
difficulties
..............................................91
interference / VoIP
................................98
multi-line (PBX)
.....................................46
Text, entering
.........................................130
Transferring your faxes or
Fax Journal report
....................................79
Transparencies
,
,
,
Tray Select key
........................................56
Troubleshooting
.......................................88
document jam
.......................................80
error messages on LCD
if you are having difficulty copying
...............................................94
incoming calls
....................................94
Network
..............................................96
phone line or connections
PhotoCapture Center™
printing
...............................................88
printing received faxes
receiving faxes
...................................92
scanning
.............................................95
software
.............................................95
Touchscreen
......................................97
maintenance messages on LCD
paper jam
..............................................81
U
Unscannable area
....................................30
V
Voice Mail
................................................42
W
Warranties (Printed / In the box)
Notice-Disclaimer
...................................iv
Windows
®
See Software User's Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User's Guide.
World Wide Web
.........................................i
148
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6
Visit us on the World Wide Web http://www.brother.com/
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ADVANCED
USER’S GUIDE
MFC-J6910DW
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Version 0
USA/CAN
User's Guides and where do I find it?
Which manual?
Safety and Legal
Quick Setup Guide
Basic User's Guide
Advanced User's Guide
Software User's Guide
Network Glossary
Network User's Guide
What's in it?
Read this Guide first. Please read the Safety
Instructions before you set up your machine.
See this Guide for trademarks and legal limitations.
Follow the instructions for setting up your machine and installing the drivers and software for the operating system and connection type you are using.
Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and
PhotoCapture Center™ operations and how to replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.
Learn more advanced operations: Fax, Copy, security features, printing reports and performing routine maintenance.
Follow these instructions for Printing, Scanning,
Network Scanning, PhotoCapture Center™,
Remote Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother
ControlCenter utility.
This Guide provides basic information about advanced network features of Brother machines along with explanations about general networking and common terms.
This Guide provides useful information about wired and wireless network settings and security settings using the Brother machine.
You can also find supported protocol information for your machine and detailed troubleshooting tips.
Where is it?
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
Printed / In the box
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
PDF file /
Documentation
CD-ROM
i
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Table of Contents
1
2
3
General setup 1
Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight ...........................................................4
Setting up or changing the prefix number........................................................4
Security features 6
Before you begin to use Secure Function Lock 2.0.........................................6
Setting and changing the Administrator Password..........................................7
Turning Secure Function Lock on/off...............................................................8
Sending a fax 10
Sending faxes using multiple settings ........................................................... 10
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 11
Restoring fax settings to the factory settings................................................. 11
Sending a duplex (2-sided) fax from the ADF ............................................... 12
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ...................................................13
Dual Access (Black & White only) .................................................................13
Delayed Faxing (Black & White only) ............................................................15
Delayed Batch Transmission (Black & White only) .......................................16
Checking and canceling waiting jobs............................................................. 16
Polled Transmit (Black & White only) ............................................................17
ii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
5
6
Receiving a fax 18
Receiving faxes into memory when paper tray is empty ...............................18
only).................................................................21
Turning off Memory Receive operations........................................................22
Changing Memory Receive operations .........................................................22
Setting a Remote Access Code.....................................................................23
Using your Remote Access Code..................................................................23
Changing your Fax Forwarding number ........................................................25
Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation.................................................26
Dialing and storing numbers 29
Dialing access codes and credit card numbers .............................................33
Storing One Touch numbers from Outgoing Calls.........................................34
Storing One Touch numbers from the Caller ID history.................................34
Storing Speed Dial numbers from Outgoing Calls.........................................35
Storing Speed Dial numbers from the Caller ID history.................................36
Setting up groups for Broadcasting ...............................................................37
Printing reports 39
iii
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
8
Making copies 41
Enlarging or reducing the copied image ........................................................ 42
Making N in 1 copies or a poster (Page Layout) ........................................... 43
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive 54
Memory cards, USB Flash memory drive and folder structures .................... 54
Adjusting Brightness, Contrast and Color...................................................... 60
Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 62
Restoring all settings to the factory settings .................................................. 62
Scan to a memory card or USB Flash memory drive .......................................... 63
iv
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9
A
B
C
Printing photos from a camera 66
Printing photos directly from a PictBridge camera...............................................66
Printing photos directly from a digital camera (without PictBridge)......................69
Routine maintenance 70
Cleaning the outside of the machine .............................................................70
Cleaning the machine’s printer platen ...........................................................71
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers for paper tray #2 .....................................74
Glossary 77
Index 81
v
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
General setup
Memory storage
Even if there is a power failure, you will not lose the settings you have chosen using the
MENU button because they are stored permanently. Also, you will not lose your settings in the FAX, SCAN, COPY and
PHOTO CAPTURE mode key menus if you have chosen Set New Default or
Favorite Settings. You may have to reset the date and time.
Note
During a power failure the machine will retain messages that are in the memory for approximately 24 hours.
1
1
Volume Settings
Ring Volume
You can choose a range of ring volume levels, from High to Off. The machine will keep your new default setting until you change it.
1
Setting the Ring Volume from the menu
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Volume.
e
Press Volume.
f
Press Ring.
g
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
1
1
1
1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 1
Beeper Volume
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep when you press a key, make a mistake, or after you send or receive a fax.
You can choose a range of beeper volume levels, from High to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Volume.
e
Press Volume.
f
Press Beeper.
g
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Speaker Volume
You can choose a range of speaker volume levels, from High to Off.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Volume.
e
Press Volume.
f
Press Speaker.
g
Press Low, Med, High or Off.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
You can also adjust the speaker volume by pressing Hook.
a
Press Hook on the control panel.
b
Press d or c on the Touchscreen to display the Volume button.
c
Press Volume.
d
Press d or c on the Touchscreen.
Each button press changes the volume to the next setting.
e
Press Hook on the control panel.
1
2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Automatic Daylight
Saving Time
You can set the machine to change automatically for daylight saving time. It will reset itself forward one hour in the Spring and backward one hour in the Fall. Make sure you have set the correct date and time in the
Date&Time setting.
The factory setting is Off, so you will have to turn on Automatic Daylight Saving Time as follows.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display
Auto Daylight.
e
Press Auto Daylight.
f
Press On (or Off).
g
Press Stop/Exit.
1
General setup
Sleep Mode
You can choose how long the machine must be idle (from 1 to 60 minutes) before it goes into Sleep Mode. The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Sleep Mode.
e
Press Sleep Mode.
f
Press 1 Min, 2 Mins, 3 Mins,
5 Mins, 10 Mins, 30 Mins or
60 Mins, which is the length of time the machine is idle before entering sleep mode.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
1
1
3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 1
LCD screen
Setting the backlight brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight. If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
e
Press LCD Settings.
f
Press Backlight.
g
Press Light, Med or Dark.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight
1
You can set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go back to the Ready screen.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display LCD Settings.
e
Press LCD Settings.
f
Press Dim Timer.
g
Press 10 Secs, 20 Secs, 30 Secs or
Off.
h
Press Stop/Exit.
1
Dial Prefix
The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a predefined number before every fax number you dial. For example, if your telephone system requires you to dial 9 before dialing an outside number use this setting to automatically dial 9 for every fax you send.
1
Setting up or changing the prefix number
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Initial Setup.
c
Press Initial Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Dial Prefix.
e
Press Dial Prefix.
f
Press On (or Off).
g
Press Dial Prefix.
h
Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
i
Press OK.
Note
• If your telephone system requires a timed break recall (hookflash), press ! to enter the break.
• You cannot use ! with any other numbers or characters.
• (Canada only) If the pulse dialing mode is on, # and l are not available to use.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
1
4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mode Timer
The machine has four temporary mode keys on the control panel: FAX, SCAN, COPY and
PHOTO CAPTURE. You can change the amount of time the machine takes after the last Scan, Copy or PhotoCapture operation before it returns to FAX mode. If you choose
Off, the machine stays in the mode you used last.
1
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
General Setup.
c
Press General Setup.
d
Press a or b to display Mode Timer.
e
Press Mode Timer.
f
Press 0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,
2 Mins, 5 Mins or Off.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
General setup
1
5
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2
Security features
Secure Function Lock
2.0
2
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict public access to certain machine functions:
Fax Tx (Fax Transmit)
Fax Rx (Fax Receive)
Copy
Scan
PCC
PC Print
Color Print
Page Limit
This feature also prevents users from changing the default settings of the machine by limiting access to the menu settings.
Before using the security features, you must first enter an administrator password.
Access to restricted operations can be enabled by creating a restricted user.
Restricted users must enter a user password to use the machine.
Make a careful note of your password. If you forget it, please call Brother Customer
Service.
Note
• Only administrators can set limitations and make changes for each user.
• If Fax Tx is disabled, you cannot use any functions in the Fax menu.
• Polling Receive is enabled only when both
Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.
Before you begin to use
Secure Function Lock 2.0
You can configure Secure Function Lock 2.0 settings using a Web browser. Before configuration, following preparations are needed.
a
Start your Web browser.
b
Type “http://machine’s IP address/” into your browser’s address bar (where “machine’s IP address” is the machine’s IP address).
For example: http://192.168.1.2/
Note
You can find the machine's IP address in the Network Configuration List. (See
Printing the Network Configuration List in the Network User’s Guide.) c
Enter a password in the Login box.
(This is a password to log into the machine's Web page, not the administrator password for Secure
Function Lock.) Click .
2
2
6
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Note
If you are using a Web browser to configure the machine's setting for the first time, set a password.
1
Click
Please configure the password.
2
Enter a password you want to use
(up to 32 characters).
3
Re-enter the password in
Confirm new password box.
4
Click Submit.
Setting and changing the
Administrator Password
2
You can configure these settings using a
Web browser. To set up the Web page, see
Before you begin to use Secure Function
Lock 2.0 on page 6. Then follow the
instructions below.
Setting the administrator password
The password you set in these steps is for the administrator. This password is used to set up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on
or off. (See Setting up restricted users on page 8 and Turning Secure Function Lock
2
a
Click Administrator.
b
Click Secure Function Lock.
c
Enter a four-digit number for the
Security features password in the New Password box.
d
Re-enter the password in the
Retype Password box.
e
Click Submit.
Changing the administrator password
2
a
Click Administrator.
b
Click Secure Function Lock.
c
Enter a four-digit number for the new password in the New Password box.
d
Re-enter the new password in the
Retype Password box.
e
Click Submit.
2
7
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 2
Setting up restricted users
You can set up users with restrictions and a password. You can set up to 10 restricted users.
You can configure these settings using a
Web browser.
To set up the Web page, see Before you
begin to use Secure Function Lock 2.0 on page 6. Then follow the instructions
below.
a
Click Administrator.
b
Click Secure Function Lock.
c
Enter an alphanumeric Group name or
User name (up to 15 characters) in the
ID Number/Name box and then enter a four-digit password in the PIN box.
d
Uncheck the functions that you want to restrict in the Print box or the Others box. If you want to configure the maximum page count, check the On box in Page Limit, and then enter the number in the Max. box. Then click
Submit.
Note
• You cannot use the same password as another user’s password.
• You can set up one Public user. Public users do not need to enter a password.
For more information, see the Network
User's Guide.
2
Turning Secure Function
Lock on/off
Note
Make a careful note of the administrator password. If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will show
Wrong Password. Enter the correct password. If you forget it, please call
Brother Customer Service.
Turning Secure Function Lock on
a
Press MENU.
b
Press General Setup.
c
Press a or b to display
Function Lock.
d
Press Function Lock.
e
Press Lock OffiOn.
f
Enter your four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
Turning Secure Function Lock off
a
Press .
b
Press Lock OniOff.
c
Enter your four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
2
8
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Switching users
This setting allows a restricted user to log on the machine when Secure Function Lock is turned on.
a
Hold down Shift as you press l.
Or, on the Touchscreen, press
Publ ic
or xxxxx
(where xxxxx is the user’s name). Then press Change User. b
Press a or b to display your user name.
c
Press your user name.
d
Enter your four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
2
Changing to the Public mode
2
a
Press xxxxx the user’s name).
b
Press Go to Public.
(where xxxxx is
Note
After a restricted user has finished using the machine, it will return to the Public setting within the same time as the Mode
Timer setting. (See Mode Timer on page 5.)
Security features
2
9
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3
Sending a fax
Additional sending options
Sending faxes using multiple settings
3
When you send a fax you can choose a combination of settings, such as
Fax Resolution, Contrast,
Duplex Fax, Glass Scan Size,
Real Time TX, and Preview.
You can also choose: Call History,
Phone Book, Broadcasting,
Delayed Fax, Batch TX, Polled TX,
Polling RX, Overseas Mode,
Set New Default, and Factory Reset.
Some settings are only available when sending black & white faxes.
a
Press (FAX).
The LCD shows:
3
b
Press d or c to display a setting you want to change. When the setting is displayed, press it.
c
Press an option.
d
Repeat steps b to c to change more
settings.
Note
• Most settings are temporary and the machine returns to its default settings after you send a fax.
• You can save some of the settings you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you
change them again. (See Setting your
changes as the new default on page 11.)
Stop faxing
3
To stop faxing, press Stop/Exit.
Contrast
If your document is very light or very dark, you may want to change the contrast. For most documents the factory setting Auto can be used. It automatically chooses the suitable contrast for your document.
Choose Light when sending a light document. Choose Dark when sending a dark document.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display Contrast.
c
Press Contrast.
d
Press Auto, Light or Dark.
Note
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the machine will send the fax using the Auto setting in any of the following conditions:
• When you send a color fax.
• When you choose Photo as the Fax
Resolution.
3
3
10
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Changing fax resolution
The quality of a fax can be improved by changing the fax resolution.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display
Fax Resolution.
c
Press Fax Resolution.
d
Press the resolution you want.
Note
You can choose four different resolution settings for black & white faxes and two for color faxes.
3
Black & White
Standard
Fine
S.Fine
Photo
Suitable for most typed documents.
Good for small print and transmits a little slower than
Standard resolution.
Good for small print or artwork and transmits slower than Fine resolution.
Use when the document has varying shades of gray or is a photograph. Photo has the slowest transmission.
Color
Standard
Fine
Suitable for most typed documents.
Use when the document is a photograph. The transmission time is slower than Standard resolution.
If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then use the Color Start key to send a fax, the machine will send the fax using the Fine setting.
Sending a fax
Setting your changes as the new default
3
You can save the fax settings for
Fax Resolution, Contrast,
Glass Scan Size, Preview and
Real Time TX you use most often by setting them as default. These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to choose the setting you want to change, and then press your new option.
Repeat this step for each setting you want to change.
c
After changing the last setting, press d or c to display Set New Default.
d
Press Set New Default.
e
Press Yes.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
Restoring fax settings to the factory settings
3
You can restore all the fax settings you have changed to the factory settings. These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display
Factory Reset.
c
Press Factory Reset.
d
Press Yes.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
3
11
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 3
Additional sending operations
Sending a duplex (2-sided) fax from the ADF
3
You can send 2-sided documents up to Legal size from the ADF.
a
Press Duplex on the machine’s control panel.
b
Load your document in the ADF.
c
Press Fax.
d
Do one of the following:
If your document is flipped on the
Long edge, press
DuplexScan :LongEdge.
Long edge
Portrait Landscape
3
If your document is flipped on the
Short edge, press
DuplexScan :ShortEdge.
Short edge
Portrait Landscape
Sending a fax manually
Manual transmission lets you hear the dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
3
Note
To send a multiple page fax, use the ADF.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
To listen for a dial tone, press Hook or pick up the handset of the external telephone.
d
Dial the fax number.
Note
If your network supports the LDAP protocol you can search for fax numbers and E-mail addresses on your server.
(See LDAP operation in the Network
User’s Guide.) e
When you hear the fax tone, press
Black Start or Color Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, press
Send on the Touchscreen to send the fax.
If you pressed Color Start, go to
f
If you picked up the handset of an external telephone, replace it.
e
Enter the fax number.
f
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine will now scan and send your document.
12
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Sending a fax at the end of a conversation
3
At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.
a
Ask the other party to wait for fax tones
(beeps) and then to press the Start or
Send key before hanging up.
b
Press (FAX).
c
Load your document.
d
Press Black Start or Color Start.
If you are using the scanner glass, press Send to send the fax.
e
Replace the handset of the external phone.
Dual Access
(Black & White only)
You can dial a number and start scanning the fax into memory—even when the machine is sending from memory, receiving faxes or printing PC data. The LCD shows the new job number and available memory.
The number of pages you can scan into the memory will vary depending on the data that is printed on them.
Note
If the Out of Memory message appears while scanning a document, press
Stop/Exit to cancel or Black Start to send the scanned pages.
3
Sending a fax
Broadcasting
(Black & White only)
Broadcasting is when the same fax message is automatically sent to more than one fax number. You can include Groups, One Touch numbers, Speed Dial numbers, and up to 50 manually dialed numbers in the same broadcast.
After the broadcast is finished, a Broadcast
Report will be printed.
3
3
Before you begin the broadcast
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers must be stored in the machine's memory before they can be used in a broadcast. (See Storing One
Touch Dial numbers and Storing Speed Dial
numbers in chapter 7 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Group numbers must also be stored in the machine's memory before they can be used in a broadcast. Group numbers include many stored One Touch Dial and Speed Dial
numbers for easier dialing. (See Setting up
groups for Broadcasting on page 37.)
3
How to broadcast a fax
a
Press (FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
d
Press Broadcasting.
e
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
Press Add Number and enter a number by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
3
13
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 3
Note
If you downloaded Internet Fax:
If you want to broadcast using an E-mail address, press , enter the E-mail address, and press OK. (See Entering
Text in appendix C of the Basic User's
Guide.)
Press Phone Book.
Press to search by
Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Press the locations where you want to send a fax.
Press OK.
Note
If you chose Numerical Order:
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
f
After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step e, press OK.
g
Press Black Start.
Faxing from the ADF
The machine starts scanning and sending the document.
Faxing from the scanner glass
When the LCD asks you Next Page?, do one of the following:
To send a single page, press No (or press Black Start again).
The machine starts sending the document.
To send more than one page, press
Yes and place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press Black Start.
The machine starts scanning the page. (Repeat this step for each additional page.)
14
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Note
• If you did not use up any of the numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to as many as 266 different numbers.
• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the number of locations used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able to use dual access and delayed fax.
• If the Out of Memory message appears, press Stop/Exit to stop the job.
If more than one page has been scanned, press Black Start to send the portion that is in the machine’s memory.
Canceling a Broadcast in progress
a
Press Stop/Exit.
b
Do one of the following:
To cancel the entire broadcast, press
Entire Broadcast. Go to step c.
To cancel the current job, press the button that displays the number
To exit without canceling, press
Stop/Exit.
3
c
When the LCD asks if you want to cancel the entire broadcast, do one of the following:
Press Yes to confirm.
To exit without canceling, press No or Stop/Exit.
d
Do one of the following:
To cancel the current job, press Yes.
To exit without canceling, press No or Stop/Exit.
Real Time Transmission
When you are sending a fax, the machine will scan the document into the memory before sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone line is free, the machine will start dialing and sending.
Sometimes, you may want to send an important document immediately, without waiting for memory transmission. You can do this by turning on Real Time TX.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Real Time TX.
d
Press Real Time TX.
e
Press On.
Note
• If you are sending a color fax or the memory is full and you are sending a black
& white fax from the ADF, the machine will send the document in real time (even if
Real Time TX is set to Off). Faxes from the scanner glass cannot be sent until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when you are using the scanner glass.
3
Sending a fax
Overseas Mode
If you are having difficulty sending a fax overseas due to possible interference on the telephone line, we recommend that you turn on Overseas Mode. After you send a fax using this feature, the feature will turn itself off.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display
Overseas Mode.
d
Press Overseas Mode.
e
Press On (or Off).
Delayed Faxing
(Black & White only)
3
3
You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory to be sent within 24 hours. These faxes will
be sent at the time of day you enter in step f.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Delayed Fax.
d
Press Delayed Fax.
e
Press On.
f
Enter the time you want the fax to be sent (in 24-hour format) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Press OK.
Note
• When you set 12h Clock in the
Date&Time setting, enter the time in
12-hour format.
• The number of pages you can scan into the memory depends on the amount of data that is printed on each page.
3
15
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 3
Delayed Batch Transmission
(Black & White only)
3
Before sending the delayed faxes, your machine will help you economize by sorting all the faxes in the memory by destination and scheduled time. All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be sent at the same time to the same fax number will be sent as one fax to save transmission time.
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display Batch TX.
c
Press Batch TX.
d
Press On.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Checking and canceling waiting jobs
You can check which jobs are still waiting in the memory to be sent and cancel a job.
(If there are no jobs, the LCD shows
No Jobs Waiting.) a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Remaining Jobs.
e
Press Remaining Jobs.
Any waiting jobs appear on the LCD.
f
Press a or b to scroll through the jobs and press the job you want to cancel.
Press OK.
g
Do one of the following:
To cancel, press Yes.
If you want to cancel another job go
To exit without canceling, press No.
h
When you are finished, press Stop/Exit.
3
16
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Polling overview
Polling lets you set up your machine so other people can receive faxes from you, but they pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it, so you pay for the call. The polling feature needs to be set up on both machines for this to work. Not all fax machines support polling.
3
Polled Transmit
(Black & White only)
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine to wait with a document so another fax machine can call and retrieve it.
The document will be stored and can be retrieved by any other fax machine until you
delete it from the memory. (See Checking
and canceling waiting jobs on page 16.)
3
Setup for polled transmit
a
Press (FAX).
b
Load your document.
c
Press d or c to display Polled TX.
d
Press Polled TX.
e
Press On (or Off).
f
Press d or c to display any settings you want to change, and press it. Then choose your option. After each setting is accepted, you can continue to change more settings.
g
Press Black Start.
3
Sending a fax h
If you are using the scanner glass, the
LCD will prompt you to choose one of the following options:
Press Yes to scan another page.
Press No or Black Start to send the document.
i
Place the next page on the scanner glass and press Black Start. Repeat
steps h and i for each additional
page.
Your machine will automatically send the fax.
3
17
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4
Receiving a fax
Memory Receive
(Black & White only)
You can only use one Memory Receive operation at a time:
Fax Forwarding
Paging
Fax Storage
PC-Fax Receive
Off
You can change your selection at any time. If received faxes are still in the machine’s memory when you change the Memory
Receive operation, a question will appear on
the LCD. (See Changing Memory Receive
4
Receiving faxes into memory when paper tray is empty
4
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty during fax reception, the LCD shows
No Paper Fed. Put some paper in the paper tray. (See Loading paper and other
print media in chapter 2 of the Basic User’s
Guide.)
If you don't put paper in the paper tray, the machine will carry on receiving the fax, with the remaining pages being stored in memory, if enough memory is available.
Further incoming faxes will also be stored in memory until the memory is full. When the memory is full the machine will stop automatically answering calls. To print the faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.
Fax Forwarding
When you choose Fax Forward, your machine stores the received fax in the memory. The machine will then dial the fax number you have programmed and forward the fax message.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
g
Press Memory Receive.
h
Press Fax Forward.
i
Do one of the following:
To forward faxes to another machine, enter the forwarding number (up to 20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
To forward faxes to an E-mail address, press , enter the
E-mail address and press OK.
(See Entering Text in appendix C of the Basic User’s Guide.)
4
4
18
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
j
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.
IMPORTANT
• If you choose Backup Print:On, the machine will also print the fax at your machine so you will have a copy. This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.
• When you receive a color fax, your machine prints the color fax at your machine but does not send the fax to the fax forwarding number you programmed.
k
Press Stop/Exit.
Paging
When you choose Paging, your machine dials the cell phone or pager number you have programmed. This activates your cell phone or pager so you will know that you have a fax message in the memory.
If you have set Paging, a backup copy of the received fax will automatically be printed at the machine.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
g
Press Memory Receive.
h
Press Paging.
4
Receiving a fax i
Enter your cell phone or pager number followed by # # (up to 20 digits).
Press OK.
Do not include the area code if it is the same as that of your machine.
For example, press:
1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.
j
Do one of the following:
If you are programming your cell phone number and do not need to enter a PIN, press OK.
If your pager needs a PIN, enter the
PIN, press #, press Pause, and then enter your fax number followed by
# #.
Press OK.
For example, press:
1 2 3 4 5 # Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8
9 # #
If you do not need a PIN, press:
Pause, and then enter your fax number followed by # #. Press OK.
For example, press:
Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 # # k
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You cannot change a paging number or
PIN remotely.
4
19
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 4
Fax Storage
If you choose Fax Storage, your machine stores the received fax in the memory. You will be able to retrieve fax messages from another location using the remote retrieval commands.
If you have set Fax Storage, a backup copy will automatically be printed at the machine.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
g
Press Memory Receive.
h
Press Fax Storage.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
Color faxes cannot be stored in the memory. When you receive a color fax your machine prints the color fax at your machine.
4
Printing a fax from the memory
If you have chosen Paging or Fax Storage, you can still print a fax from the memory when
you are at your machine. (See Memory
Receive (Black & White only) on page 18.)
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display Print Fax.
e
Press Print Fax.
f
Press Black Start.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
When you print a fax from the memory, the fax data will be erased.
4
20
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PC-Fax Receive
(Windows
®
only)
If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature your machine will store received faxes in memory and send them to your PC automatically. You can then use your PC to view and store these faxes.
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory. The number of received faxes that are stored in the memory will appear on the LCD.
When you start your PC and the PC-FAX
Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.
To transfer the received faxes to your PC you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX
receiving in the Software User’s Guide.)
If you choose Backup Print:On the machine will also print the fax.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
g
Press Memory Receive.
h
Press PC Fax Receive.
i
The LCD shows the message
Run PC-Fax on your computer.
Press OK.
j
Press <USB> or the PC you want to receive faxes.
4
Receiving a fax k
Press OK.
l
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.
m
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
• PC-Fax Receive is not supported in the
Mac OS.
• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive you must install the MFL-Pro Suite software on your PC. Make sure your PC is connected and turned on. (For details see PC-FAX receiving in the Software
User’s Guide.)
• If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in memory, you can use this setting to transfer your faxes to your PC. (For details, see
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal
report in appendix B of the Basic User’s
Guide.)
• When you receive a color fax, your machine prints the color fax at your machine but does not send the fax to your
PC.
Changing the destination PC
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
g
Press Memory Receive.
h
Press PC Fax Receive.
4
4
21
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 4 i
The LCD shows the message
Run PC-Fax on your computer.
Press OK.
j
Press <USB>, or the PC you want to receive faxes.
k
Press OK.
l
Press Backup Print:On or
Backup Print:Off.
m
Press Stop/Exit.
Turning off Memory Receive operations
4
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Memory Receive.
g
Press Memory Receive.
h
Press Off.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
The LCD will give you more options if there are received faxes still in the
machine’s memory. (See Changing
Memory Receive operations on page 22.)
Changing Memory Receive operations
If received faxes remain in your machine’s memory when you change the Memory
Receive Operations, the LCD will ask you one of the following questions:
Erase All Fax?
Print All Fax?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory will be erased or printed before the setting changes. If a backup copy has already been printed it will not be printed again.
• If you press No, faxes in the memory will not be erased or printed and the setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine's memory when you change to
PC Fax Receive from another option
[Fax Forward, Paging or Fax Storage], press a or b to choose the PC.
The LCD will ask you the following question:
Send Fax to PC?
• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory will be sent to your PC before the setting changes. You will be asked if you want to turn on Backup Print. (For
• If you press No, faxes in the memory will not be erased or transferred to your
PC and the setting will be unchanged.
4
22
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Receiving a fax
Remote Retrieval
You can call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine and then use the remote access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages.
4
Setting a Remote Access
Code
The Remote Access Code lets you access the remote retrieval features when you are away from your machine. Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you have to set up your own code. The factory default code is the inactive code (--- ).
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Remote Access.
e
Press Remote Access.
f
Enter a three-digit code using numbers
0-9, l, or # by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(The preset ‘l’ cannot be changed.)
4
Note
Do not use the same code as your Fax
Receive Code (l 5 1) or Telephone
Answer Code (# 5 1). (See Using external
and extension telephones in chapter 6 of the Basic User’s Guide.) g
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can change your code at any time by entering a new one. If you want to make your code inactive, press in
step f to restore the inactive setting (---l)
and press OK.
Using your Remote Access
Code
4
a
Dial your fax number from a touch-tone telephone or another fax machine.
b
When your machine answers, enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by ) at once.
c
The machine signals if it has received messages:
1 long beep — Fax messages
No beeps — No messages
d
When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command.
The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command.
The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command.
e
Press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.
f
Hang up.
Note
If your machine is set to Manual mode and you want to use the remote retrieval features, wait for about 100 seconds after it starts ringing, and then enter the remote access code within 30 seconds.
4
23
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 4
Remote Fax commands
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you call the machine and enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by ), the system will give two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.
4
Operation details Remote commands
95 Change the Fax Forwarding,
Paging or Fax Storage settings
1 OFF
2 Fax Forwarding
3 Paging
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage
You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your messages.
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot make a change because something has not been set up (for example, a Fax
Forwarding or Paging number has not been registered).
You can register your Fax Forwarding number by entering
4. (See Changing your Fax Forwarding number on page 25.) Once you have registered the number, Fax
Forwarding will work.
96 Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes
3 Erase faxes from the memory
97 Check the receiving status
1 Fax
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored
fax messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 25.)
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased from the memory.
You can check whether your machine has received any faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three short beeps.
98 Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD
2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
90 Exit
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.
Pressing 9 0 allows you to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then replace the handset.
24
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Retrieving fax messages
You can call your machine from any touch-tone telephone and have your fax messages sent to another machine. Before you use this feature, you have to turn on Fax
Storage.
a
Dial your fax number.
b
When your machine answers, enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by ) at once. If you hear one long beep, you have messages.
c
When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2.
d
Wait for a long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages sent, followed by # #
(up to 20 digits).
Note
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.
However, press # if you want to create a pause.
e
Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print your fax messages.
4
Receiving a fax
Changing your Fax
Forwarding number
You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine.
a
Dial your fax number.
b
When your machine answers, enter your remote access code (3 digits followed by ) at once. If you hear one long beep, you have messages.
c
When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4.
d
Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #.
Note
You cannot use l and # as dial numbers.
However, press # if you want to create a pause.
e
Press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.
f
Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
4
4
25
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 4
Additional receiving operations
Printing a reduced incoming fax
4
If you choose On, the machine automatically reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on one page of Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4 or A3 size paper. The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the page size of the fax and your Paper Size setting. (See Paper
Size and Type in chapter 2 of the Basic
User’s Guide.) a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Setup Receive.
e
Press Setup Receive.
f
Press a or b to display
Auto Reduction.
g
Press Auto Reduction.
h
Press On (or Off).
i
Press Stop/Exit.
4
Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation
4
At the end of a conversation, you can ask the other party to fax you information before you both hang up.
a
Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press the Start or Send key.
b
When you hear the other machine's
CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press Black Start or Color Start.
c
Press Receive to receive the fax.
d
Replace the handset of the external telephone.
26
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Polling overview
Polling lets you set up your machine so other people can receive faxes from you, but they pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it, so you pay for the call. The polling feature needs to be set up on both machines for this to work. Not all fax machines support polling.
4
Polling receive
Polling receive lets you call another fax machine to receive a fax.
4
Setup to receive polling
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
c
Press Polling RX.
d
Press On (or Off).
e
Enter the fax number you are polling using One Touch, Speed Dial or the dial pad on the control panel.
f
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The LCD shows Dialing.
4
Sequential polling
(Black & White only)
Sequential polling lets you request documents from several fax machines in one operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling
Report will be printed.
4
a
Press (FAX).
b
Press d or c to display Polling RX.
c
Press Polling RX.
d
Press On (or Off).
e
Press d or c to display Broadcasting.
Receiving a fax f
Press Broadcasting.
g
Do one of the following:
Press Add Number and enter a number by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Press Phone Book. Press to choose Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. Press a or b to select a number.
Press OK.
Note
If you chose Numerical Order:
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
h
After you have entered all the fax
numbers by repeating step g, press OK.
i
Press Black Start.
The machine polls each number or
Group number in turn for a document.
Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing to cancel the polling process.
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,
see Checking and canceling waiting jobs on page 16.
4
27
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 4
Canceling a Sequential Polling Job
a
Press Stop/Exit.
b
Do one of the following:
To cancel the entire sequential polling job, press
Entire Seq. Poll. Go to step c.
To cancel the current job, press the button that displays the number
To exit without canceling, press
Stop/Exit.
4
c
When the LCD asks if you want to cancel the entire sequential polling job, do one of the following:
Press Yes to confirm.
To exit without canceling, press No or Stop/Exit.
d
Do one of the following:
To cancel the current job, press Yes.
To exit without canceling, press No or Stop/Exit.
28
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
Dialing and storing numbers
5
Voice operations
Voice calls can be made either with an external telephone by dialing manually or by using Quick Dial numbers.
5
Tone or Pulse (Canada only)
5
If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need to send tone signals (for example, for telephone banking), follow the instructions below: a
Pick up the handset of an external telephone or press Hook.
b
Press # on the machine’s control panel.
Any digits dialed after this will send tone signals.
When you hang up, the machine will return to the Pulse dialing service.
Fax/Tel mode
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.
If you are at the extension telephone, you'll need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring and then press # 5 1 between the pseudo/double-rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by pressing
l
5 1.
If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press Hook to answer.
5
Caller ID
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller
ID subscriber service offered by many local telephone companies. Call your telephone company for details. This service shows the telephone number, or name if it is available, of your caller as the line rings.
After a few rings, the LCD shows the telephone number of your caller (and name, if available). Once you answer a call, the Caller
ID information disappears from the LCD, but the call information stays stored in the Caller
ID memory.
You can view the list or choose one of these numbers to fax to, add to One Touch or
Speed Dial, or delete from the history. (See
Caller ID history on page 32.)
You can see the first 20 characters of the number (or name).
The # Unavailable message means the call originated outside your Caller ID service area.
The Private Call message means the caller has intentionally blocked transmission of Caller ID information.
You can print a list of the Caller ID information
received by your machine. (See How to print
Note
• This feature may not be available in certain areas of the USA and Canada.
• The Caller ID service varies with different carriers. Call your local telephone company to find out about the kind of service available in your area.
5
5
29
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Setting up your area code (USA only)
5
When returning calls from the Caller ID history your machine will automatically dial
“1” plus the area code for all calls. If your local dialing plan requires that the “1” not be used for calls within your area code, enter your area code in this setting. With the area code setting, calls returned from the Caller ID history to numbers within your area code will be dialed using 10 digits (area code + 7-digit number). If your dialing plan does not follow the standard 1 + area code + 7-digit number dialing system for calling outside your area code, you may experience problems returning calls automatically from the Caller
ID history. If this is not the procedure followed by your dialing plan, you will not be able to return calls automatically.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Miscellaneous.
e
Press Miscellaneous.
f
Press a or b to display Area Code.
g
Press Area Code.
h
Enter your Area Code (3-digit number), and press OK.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
Special line considerations
5
Roll-over telephone lines
A roll-over telephone system is a group of two or more separate telephone lines that pass incoming calls to each other if they are busy.
The calls are usually passed down or “rolled over” to the next available telephone line in a preset order.
Your machine can work in a roll-over system as long as it is the last number in the sequence so the call cannot roll away. Do not put the machine on any of the other numbers; when the other lines are busy and a second fax call is received, the fax call will be sent to a line that does not have a fax machine. Your
machine will work best on a dedicated line.
5
Two-line telephone system
A two-line telephone system is nothing more than two separate telephone numbers on the same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or mixed into one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks may be equal in size and appearance and both may contain four wires (black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in a two-line telephone and see if it can access both lines. If it can, you must separate the line for your machine.
5
30
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Converting telephone wall outlets
There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways may require help from the telephone company. You can change the wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump one of the telephone numbers to it.
The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into
L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on
Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triplex adapter.
5
Triplex Adapter
5
RJ14
Dialing and storing numbers b
Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack on the back of the machine.
c
Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other end into the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD. d
Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the two-line TAD. Plug the other end into the EXT. jack on the left side of the machine.
1
2
5
RJ11
RJ14
Installing machine, external two-line
TAD and two-line telephone
When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering device (TAD) and a two-line telephone, your machine must be isolated on one line at both the wall jack and at the TAD. The most common connection is to put the machine on Line 2, which is explained in the following steps. The back of the two-line TAD must have two telephone jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other labeled L2. You will need at least three telephone line cords: the one that came with your machine and two for your external twoline TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if you add a two-line telephone.
5
a
Put the two-line TAD and the two-line telephone next to your machine.
3
4
1 Triplex Adapter
2 Two Line Telephone
3 External Two Line TAD
4 Machine
Your additional two-line telephones on other wall outlets do not require adapters. There are two ways to add a two-line telephone to the machine's wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line cord from the two-line telephone into the L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line
TAD.
31
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Additional dialing operations
Outgoing Call
The last 30 numbers you sent a fax to will be stored in the outgoing call history. You can choose one of these numbers to fax to, add to
One Touch or Speed Dial, or delete from the history.
a
Press Redial/Pause.
You can also press
(Call History).
b
Press the Outgoing Call tab.
c
Press the number you want.
d
Do one of the following:
To send a fax, press Send a fax.
If you want to store the number, press More and then press
Add to Speed Dial or
Add to One Touch Dial.
(See Storing One Touch numbers
from Outgoing Calls on page 34 or
Storing Speed Dial numbers from
If you want to delete the number from the Outgoing Call history list, press
More and then press Delete.
Press Yes to confirm.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
5
5
Caller ID history
This feature requires the Caller ID subscriber service offered by many local telephone
companies. (See Caller ID on page 29.)
The number, or name if available, from the last 30 fax and telephone calls you received will be stored in the Caller ID history. You can view the list or choose one of these numbers to fax to, add to One Touch or Speed Dial, or delete from the history. When the thirty-first call comes into the machine, it replaces information about the first call.
5
Note
If you are not a Caller ID subscriber, Caller
ID history only allows you to view and delete the dates of calls.
a
Press (Call History).
b
Press Caller ID hist.
c
Press a or b to display the number or the name you want to call.
d
Press the number or the name you want to call.
e
Do one of the following:
To send a fax, press Send a fax.
If you want to store the number, press More and then press
Add to Speed Dial or
Add to One Touch Dial.
(See Storing One Touch numbers
from the Caller ID history on page 34
and Storing Speed Dial numbers
from the Caller ID history on page 36.)
If you want to delete the number from the Caller ID history list, press More and then press Delete.
Press Yes to confirm.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
32
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Note
• (USA only) If you redial from the Caller ID history outside your area code, you must set up your AREA CODE in advance.
(See Setting up your area code (USA
• You can print the Caller ID List.
(See How to print a report on page 40.)
Dialing access codes and credit card numbers
5
Sometimes, you may want to choose from several long distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of longdistance carriers and credit card numbers as
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. You can store these long dialing sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate One Touch and Speed Dial numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialing using the dial pad.
(See Storing One Touch Dial numbers or
Storing Speed Dial numbers in chapter 7 of the Basic User’s Guide.)
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on
Speed Dial: 03 and ‘7000’ on One Touch: 02.
You can use them both to dial ‘555-7000’ if you press the following buttons on the
Touchscreen: a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press #03.
Note
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
c
Press Send a fax.
d
Press Phone Book.
e
Press l02.
Dialing and storing numbers f
Press Send a fax.
g
Press Black Start or Color Start.
You will dial ‘555-7000’.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number with manual dialing using the dial pad. For example, to change the number to 555-7001 you could press (Phone Book), press #03, press Send a fax and then press 7001 using the dial pad.
Note
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialing sequence, create a pause in the number by pressing
Redial/Pause. Each key press adds a
3.5-second delay.
5
33
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Additional ways to store numbers
Storing One Touch numbers from Outgoing Calls
5
You can store One Touch numbers from the
Outgoing Call history. a
Press Redial/Pause.
You can also choose by pressing
(Call History).
b
Press Outgoing Call tab.
c
Press the number you want to store.
d
Press More.
e
Press Add to One Touch Dial.
f
To choose where the number will be stored, do one of the following:
To accept the displayed next available One Touch location, press
OK.
To enter a different One Touch location, press a number by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If the One Touch location you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different location.
g
Do one of the following:
Enter the name by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen (up to
16 characters).
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
To store the number without a name, press OK.
34
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5
h
Press OK to accept the displayed telephone or fax number.
i
When the LCD shows your settings, press OK to confirm. j
Press Stop/Exit.
Storing One Touch numbers from the Caller ID history
5
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service from your telephone company, you can also store One Touch numbers from incoming
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID on page 29.)
a
Press (Call History).
b
Press the Caller ID hist. tab.
c
Press a or b to display the number you want to store.
d
Press the number you want to store.
e
Press More.
f
Press Add to One Touch Dial.
g
To choose where the number will be stored, do one of the following:
To accept the displayed next available One Touch location, press
OK.
To enter a different One Touch location, press a number by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
If the One Touch location you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different location.
h
Do one of the following:
If you want to store the displayed name, press OK.
Enter the name (up to 16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
To store the number without a name, press OK.
i
Press OK to confirm the fax or telephone number.
j
When the LCD shows your settings, press OK to confirm. k
Press Stop/Exit.
Storing Speed Dial numbers from Outgoing Calls
5
You can also store Speed Dial numbers from the Outgoing Call history. a
Press Redial/Pause.
You can also choose the number by pressing (Call History).
b
Press the Outgoing Call tab.
c
Press the name or number you want to store.
d
Press More.
e
Press Add to Speed Dial.
Dialing and storing numbers f
Do one of the following:
Enter the name (up to 16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
To store the number without a name, press OK.
g
Press OK to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.
h
Do one of the following:
Enter the second fax or telephone number (up to 20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
If you do not want to store a second number, press OK.
i
To choose where the number will be stored, do one of the following:
To accept the displayed next available Speed Dial location, press
OK.
To enter a different Speed Dial location, press a 2-digit number by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
• Speed Dial locations begin with # (for example, # 0 2).
• If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different location.
j
When the LCD shows your settings, press OK to confirm.
k
Press Stop/Exit.
5
35
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Storing Speed Dial numbers from the Caller ID history
5
If you have the Caller ID subscriber service from your telephone company, you can also store Speed Dial numbers from incoming
calls in the Caller ID History. (See Caller ID on page 29.)
a
Press (Call History).
b
Press the Caller ID hist. tab.
c
Press a or b to display the number you want to store.
d
Press the number you want to store.
e
Press More.
f
Press Add to Speed Dial.
g
Do one of the following:
If you want to store the displayed name, press OK.
Enter the name (up to 16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(To help you enter letters, see
Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide.)
To store the number without a name, press OK.
h
Press OK to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.
i
Do one of the following:
Enter a second fax or telephone number (up to 20 digits) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
If you do not want to store a second number, press OK.
j
To choose where the number will be stored, do one of the following:
To accept the displayed next available Speed Dial location, press
OK.
To enter a different Speed Dial location, press a 2-digit number by pressing the buttons on the
Touchscreen.
Press OK.
Note
• Speed Dial locations begin with # (for example, # 0 2).
• If the 2-digit Speed Dial location you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different location.
k
When the LCD shows your settings, press OK to confirm.
l
Press Stop/Exit.
36
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting up groups for
Broadcasting
Groups, which can be stored on a One Touch key or Speed Dial location, allow you to send the same fax message to many fax numbers by pressing only a One Touch key or a Speed
Dial location by pressing
(Phone Book), the two-digit location,
Send a fax and Black Start.
First, you'll need to store each fax number in a One Touch key or Speed Dial location.
Then you can include them as numbers in the
Group. Each Group uses up a One Touch key or Speed Dial location. You can have up to six Groups, or you can assign up to
215 numbers to a large Group.
(See Broadcasting (Black & White only) on page 13 and Storing One Touch Dial
numbers and Storing Speed Dial numbers in
chapter 7 of the Basic User’s Guide.) a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press More.
c
Press Setup Groups.
d
Press Set Speed Dial or
Set One Touch Dial.
If you choose Set Speed Dial go to
e
To accept the next available One Touch key number press OK.
f
Enter the group name (up to
16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
g
When the LCD shows the next available
Group number, press OK.
This Group number and name will automatically be assigned to the next available Speed Dial location.
5
Dialing and storing numbers h
Add One Touch or Speed Dial numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a red checkmark. Press OK.
If you want to list the numbers in alphabetical order, press .
Note
One Touch Dial locations begin with l.
Speed Dial locations begin with #.
i
When the LCD shows the Group Name and numbers, press OK to confirm.
j
Do one of the following:
To store another Group for
broadcasting, repeat steps b to i.
To finish storing Groups for broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can print a list of all the One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. Group numbers will be marked in the GROUP column.
5
37
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 5
Changing a Group name
a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press More.
c
Press Change.
d
Press a or b to display the Group you want to change.
e
Press the Group.
f
Press Name:.
g
Enter the new name (up to
16 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.
Press OK.
(See Entering Text in appendix C of the
Basic User’s Guide. For example, type
NEW CLIENTS.)
Note
How to change the stored name or number:
If you want to change a character, press
d
or c to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then press . Re-enter the character.
h
Press OK.
i
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Deleting a Group
a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press More.
c
Press Delete.
d
Press a or b to display the Group you want to delete.
e
Press the Group Name.
f
Press OK.
Press Yes to confirm.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
5
Deleting a number from a Group
a
Press (Phone Book).
b
Press More.
c
Press Change.
d
Press a or b to display the Group you want to change.
e
Press the Group.
f
Press Add/Del.
g
Press a or b to display the number you want to delete from the Group.
h
Press the check box of the number you want to delete to uncheck it.
Press OK to confirm.
i
Press OK.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
5
38
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6
Printing reports
6
Fax reports
Use the MENU button on the LCD to set up the
Transmission Verification Report and the
Journal Period.
6
Transmission Verification
Report
You can use the Transmission Verification
Report as proof that you sent a fax. (For details about how to set up the type of report you want, see Transmission Verification
Report in chapter 4 of the Basic User's
Guide.)
6
Fax Journal (activity report)
You can set the machine to print a journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or
24 hours, 2 or 7 days). If you set the interval to Off, you can still print the report by
following the steps in How to print a report on page 40. The factory setting is
Every 50 Faxes.
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display Fax.
c
Press Fax.
d
Press a or b to display
Report Setting.
e
Press Report Setting.
f
Press Journal Period.
6
g
Press d or c to choose an interval.
If you choose Every 50 Faxes, go to
6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at the chosen time and then erase all jobs from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with
200 jobs before the time you chose has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the jobs from the memory.
Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored
50 jobs.
h
Enter the time to start printing in 24-hour format.
Press OK.
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
Note
When you set 12h Clock in the
Date&Time setting, enter the time in
12-hour format.
i
If you choose Every 7 Days, the LCD will ask you to choose the first day for the 7-day countdown.
j
Press Stop/Exit.
6
39
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 6
Reports
The following reports are available:
Transmission
Prints a Transmission Verification Report for your last transmission.
Help List
A help list showing how to program your machine.
Quick Dial
Lists names and numbers stored in the
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in alphabetical or numerical order.
Fax Journal
Lists information about the last incoming and outgoing faxes.
(TX: Transmit.) (RX: Receive.)
User Settings
Lists your settings.
Network Config
Lists your Network settings.
WLAN Report
Prints the result of the WLAN connection.
Caller ID hist.
Lists the available Caller ID information about the last 30 received faxes and telephone calls.
6
How to print a report
a
Press MENU.
b
Press a or b to display
Print Reports.
c
Press Print Reports.
d
Press the report you want.
e
(Quick Dial Only) Press
Alphabetical Order or
Numerical Order. f
Press Black Start.
g
Press Stop/Exit.
6
40
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7
Making copies
7
Copy settings
You can change the copy settings for the next copy.
These settings are temporary. The machine returns to its default settings 1 minute after copying unless you have set the Mode Timer
to 30 seconds or less. (See Mode Timer on page 5.)
To change a setting, press COPY and then press d or c to scroll through the copy settings. When the setting you want is displayed, press it and choose your option.
When you are finished choosing settings, press Black Start or Color Start.
7
Note
• You can save some of the settings that you use most often by setting them as default. These settings will stay until you
change them again. (See Setting your
• The Ink Save Mode,
Thin Paper Copy, Book Copy and
Watermark Copy features are supported by technology from Reallusion,
Inc.
Stop copying
7
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.
Changing copy quality
You can choose from a range of quality. The factory setting is Normal.
Fast
Fast copy speed and lowest amount of ink used. Use to save time printing documents to be proof-read, large documents or many copies.
Normal
Normal is the recommended mode for ordinary printouts. This produces good copy quality with good copy speed.
Best
Use Best mode to copy precise images such as photographs. This provides the highest resolution and slowest speed.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Quality.
e
Press Quality.
f
Press Fast, Normal or Best.
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
7
7
41
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 7
Enlarging or reducing the copied image
You can choose an enlargement or reduction ratio. If you choose Fit to Page, your machine will adjust the size automatically to the paper size you set.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Enlarge/Reduce.
e
Press Enlarge/Reduce.
f
Press 100%, Enlarge, Reduce,
Fit to Page or Custom(25-400%).
g
Do one of the following:
If you chose Enlarge or Reduce, press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want.
If you chose Custom(25-400%), enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from 25% to 400%.
Press OK.
If you chose 100% or Fit to Page,
7
198% 4"x6"iA4
186% 4"x6"iLTR
130% LTRiLGR
104% EXEiLTR
100%
97% LTRiA4
93% A4iLTR
85% LTRiEXE
83% LGLiA4
78% LGLiLTR
64% LGRiLTR
46% LTRi4"x6"
Fit to Page
Custom(25-400%) h
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
• Page Layout is not available with
Enlarge/Reduce.
• Page Layout, Book Copy, Sort,
Thin Paper Copy and
Watermark Copy are not available with
Fit to Page.
• Fit to Page does not work properly when the document on the scanner glass is skewed more than 3 degrees. Using the document guidelines on the left and top, place your document in the upper left hand corner, with the document face down on the scanner glass.
• Fit to Page is not available for a Legal size document.
• When using Ledger or A3 size paper,
1sidei2side and 2sidei2side of
Duplex Copy is not available with
Enlarge/Reduce.
42
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Making copies
Making N in 1 copies or a poster (Page Layout)
The N in 1 copy feature can help you save paper by letting you copy two or four pages onto one printed page.
The 1 to 2 feature copies one Ledger or A3 size page onto two Letter or A4 size pages. If you use this setting, use the scanner glass.
You can also produce a poster. When you use the poster feature your machine divides your document into sections, then enlarges the sections so you can assemble them into a poster. If you want to print a poster, you must use the scanner glass and Tray #1.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure the paper size is set to Letter,
Ledger, A4, A3 or Executive.
• If you are producing multiple color copies,
N in 1 copy is not available.
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means
Landscape.
• You can only make one poster copy and
1 to 2 copy at a time.
• Poster copy is not available when using transparencies or Executive size paper.
• Poster copy is not available when you feed paper from Tray #2.
7
Note
• Watermark Copy, Book Copy, Sort,
Thin Paper Copy, Ink Save Mode and Enlarge/Reduce are not available with Page Layout.
• Skew Adjustment is not available with
Poster and 1 to 2 copy.
• Duplex Copy is not available with Poster copy.
• 2sidei2side and 2sidei1side of
Duplex Copy are not available with
1 to 2.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
e
Press Page Layout.
f
Press d or c to display Off(1in1),
2in1(P), 2in1(L), 4in1(P),
4in1(L), 1 to 2, Poster (2 x 1),
Poster (2 x 2), Poster (3 x 3) or 2 in 1 (ID)
.
1
For details about 2 in 1 (ID), see 2 in 1 ID Copy on page 46.
If you chose 2in1 or
Poster (2 x 2)with Ledger or A3,
go to step g to choose the paper size of
your document.
If you choose another setting, go to
g
Do one of the following:
If you chose 2in1(P) or 2in1(L), press LGRx2 i LGRx1,
LTRx2 i LGRx1, A3x2 i A3x1 or
A4x2 i A3x1.
If you chose Poster (2 x 2), press LGRx1 i LGRx4,
LTRx1 i LGRx4, A3x1 i A3x4 or
A4x1 i A3x4.
7
43
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 7 h
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start to scan the page.
If you placed the document in the ADF or are making a poster, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go
i
After the machine scans the page, press Yes to scan the next page.
j
Place the next page on the scanner glass. Press Black Start or Color Start to scan the document.
Repeat steps i and j for each page of
the layout.
k
After all the pages have been scanned, press No to finish.
Note
If you have chosen photo paper as the
Paper Type for N in 1 copies, the machine will print the images as if plain paper had been chosen.
If you are copying from the ADF, insert the document face up in the direction shown below:
2in1(P)
2in1(L)
4in1(P)
4in1(L)
44
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If you are copying from the scanner glass, place the document face down in the direction shown below:
2in1(P)
Poster (2 x 1)
2in1(L)
Poster (2 x 2)
4in1(P)
4in1(L)
1 to 2
Poster (3 x 3)
Making copies
7
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
45
Chapter 7
2 in 1 ID Copy
You can copy both sides of your identification card onto one page, keeping the original card size. Make sure the paper size is set to Letter or A4.
7
Note
You can copy an identification card to the extent permitted under applicable laws.
See Legal limitations for copying in the
Safety and Legal Booklet.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Place your identification card face down at the left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1 0.12 in. (3 mm) or greater (top, left)
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Page Layout.
e
Press Page Layout.
f
Press d or c to display 2 in 1 (ID).
g
Press 2 in 1 (ID).
h
Press Black Start or Color Start.
The machine starts scanning the first page.
i
After the machine copies the one side, press Yes. Turn over the identification card and press Black Start or
Color Start to scan the another side.
Note
• Watermark Copy, Book Copy, Sort,
Duplex Copy, Thin Paper Copy,
Ink Save Mode and Enlarge/Reduce are not available with 2 in 1 (ID).
• If you are producing multiple color copies,
2 in 1 (ID) copy is not available.
Sorting copies using the ADF
7
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order 321, 321, 321, and so on.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Stack/Sort.
e
Press Stack/Sort.
f
Press Sort.
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
Fit to Page, Page Layout and
Book Copy are not available with Sort.
46
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the copy density to make copies darker or lighter.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display Density.
e
Press Density.
f
Press c to make the copy darker or press d to make the copy lighter.
Press OK.
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
7
Making copies
Ink Save Mode
Ink Save Mode can help you save some ink.
Your machine detects the edges of the image and prints the outline of the image.
The amount of ink saved will vary depending on the document.
Ink Save Mode: Off
7
7
Ink Save Mode: On
7
7
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document. c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
e
Press Advanced Settings.
f
Press Ink Save Mode.
47
Chapter 7 g
If you do not want to change any additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
• Watermark Copy, Book Copy,
Skew Adjustment,
Thin Paper Copy and Page Layout are not available with Ink Save Mode.
• Ink Save Mode may make your printouts look different from your original document.
Thin Paper Copy
7
If your document is a duplex copy on thin paper, choose Thin Paper Copy so the print on the other side does not bleed through.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
e
Press Advanced Settings.
f
Press Thin Paper Copy.
g
Press Black Start or Color Start.
Note
Fit to Page, Page Layout,
Skew Adjustment, Ink Save Mode,
Book Copy and Watermark Copy are not available with Thin Paper Copy.
Skew Adjustment
If your scanned copy is skewed, your machine can correct the data automatically.
This setting is only available when using the scanner glass.
7
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document. c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Skew Adjustment.
e
Press Skew Adjustment.
f
Press Auto (or Off).
g
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
• 1 to 2, Poster, Ink Save Mode,
Thin Paper Copy, Book Copy,
Watermark Copy, 2sidei2side and
2sidei1side of Duplex Copy are not available with Skew Adjustment.
• You cannot use this setting with Ledger,
A3 or paper that is smaller than
2.52 in.
3.58 in. (64 mm 91 mm).
• This setting is only available for paper that is rectangular or square.
• You cannot use this setting with a thick document, such as a book.
• Skew Adjustment is only available if the document is skewed by less than 3 degrees.
48
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Book Copy
Book copy corrects dark borders and skew when copying from the scanner glass. Your machine can correct the data automatically or you can make specific corrections.
7
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
e
Press Advanced Settings.
f
Press Book Copy.
g
If you are finished making corrections, press Black Start or Color Start.
Note
Page Layout, Sort, Duplex Copy,
Skew Adjustment, Ink Save Mode,
Fit to Page, Thin Paper Copy and
Watermark Copy are not available with
Book Copy.
Watermark Copy
7
You can place a logo or text into your document as a Watermark. You can select one of the template watermarks, data from your media cards or USB Flash memory drive, or scanned data.
Note
Fit to Page, Page Layout,
Thin Paper Copy,
Skew Adjustment, Ink Save Mode and Book Copy are not available with
Watermark Copy.
Making copies
Using a template
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document.
c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
e
Press Advanced Settings.
f
Press Watermark Copy.
g
Press Edit Template.
h
Change the settings from the options displayed on the LCD if required.
i
Press OK to confirm to use watermark.
j
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
7
Using a media card or USB Flash memory drive
a
Press (COPY).
b
Load your document. c
Enter the number of copies you want.
d
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
e
Press Advanced Settings.
f
Press Watermark Copy.
g
Press Use Image.
h
Insert a media card or USB Flash memory drive. Press Media.
i
Press the data you want to use for the watermark.
7
7
49
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 7 j
Change any additional settings from the options shown on the LCD.
k
Press OK to confirm to use watermark.
l
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive while
PHOTO CAPTURE is blinking to avoid damaging the card, USB Flash memory drive, or the data stored on them.
Using a scanned paper document as your watermark
7
a
Press (COPY).
b
Enter the number of copies you want.
c
Press d or c to display
Advanced Settings.
d
Press Advanced Settings.
e
Press Watermark Copy.
f
Press Use Image.
g
Press Scan. Place the page that you want to use as a watermark on the scanner glass.
h
Press Black Start or Color Start.
i
Take out the watermark document you scanned and load the document you want to copy.
j
Press Transparency, and then press d or c to change the Transparency of the watermark.
Press OK.
k
Press OK.
l
Press OK to confirm to use watermark.
m
If you do not want to change any additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start.
Note
You cannot enlarge or reduce the scanned watermark.
Duplex (2-sided) copying
You can reduce the amount of paper used for copies by copying on both sides of the paper.
We recommend you load your document in the ADF for duplex copying.
7
Note
• You can copy 2-sided documents up to
Legal size using the ADF.
• You can only use plain paper sizes Letter,
Legal, Ledger, A4, A5, A3 or Executive a
Press Duplex on the machine’s panel.
b
Load your document.
If you want to copy a 2-sided document, load your document in the ADF.
c
Press Copy.
d
Do one of the following:
If you are copying Ledger or A3 size
If you are copying Letter, Legal, A4,
A5 or Executive size document, go to
e
Press More.
f
Press
A3/LGR Duplex Copy Setting.
Note
N in 1 copy is not available with
A3/LGR Duplex Copy Setting.
50
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
g
Press Fit to Page or Keep Scale.
Note
If you choose Fit to Page, your machine will reduce the document size automatically to fit the printable area.
If you choose Keep Scale, your machine will not change the document size. The top and bottom might be cut off depending on the document size.
h
Press d or c to display the duplex copy
type you want, and press it. (See Duplex
i
Enter the number of copies you want.
Note
If you want to sort multiple copies, press d or c to display Stack/Sort, then press
Sort.
j
Press Black Start or Color Start.
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
If you are using the scanner glass, go to
k
Press Scan and place the next page on the scanner glass. Press Black Start or
Color Start.
The machine starts printing.
l
If you pressed Sort for multiple copies,
repeat step k for each additional page.
After all the pages have been scanned, press Complete.
The machine starts printing.
Making copies
DO NOT touch the printed page until it is ejected the second time. The machine will print the first side and eject the paper and then pull the paper in to print the second side.
Note
• If you get a paper jam, press More after
step c. Press Advanced, and then press
one of the jam prevention settings: DX1 or
DX2.
DX1 uses a longer print time for the ink to dry.
DX2 uses a longer print time and will also print in lighter colors.
• DX1 is not available for Ledger or A3 size paper.
• 2 in 1 (ID), Poster and Book Copy are not available with Duplex Copy.
• 1 to 2 and Skew Adjustment are not available with 2sidei2side and
2sidei1side.
• When using Ledger or A3 size paper,
Enlarge/Reduce is not available with
1sidei2side and 2sidei2side.
• Fit to Page is not available with
1sidei2side and 2sidei2side.
7
51
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 7
Duplex copying type
1 sided i 2 sided
(long edge flip)
Portrait
Landscape
1
2
1
2
(short edge flip)
Portrait
Landscape
1
2
1
2
2 sided i 2 sided
Portrait
2
2
2
2
7
2 sided i 1 sided
(long edge flip)
Portrait
Landscape
2
2
(short edge flip)
Portrait
Landscape
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
Landscape
2 2
2
2
52
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting your favorites
You can store the copy settings that you use most often by setting them as a favorite. You can set up to three favorites.
7
a
Press (COPY).
b
Choose the copy option and settings you want to store. c
Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings.
d
Press Favorite Settings.
e
Press Store.
Note
Set Watermark Copy to Off or
Template when storing
Favorite Settings.
f
Press the location where you want to store your setting for Favorite:1,
Favorite:2 or Favorite:3.
g
Do one of the following:
If you want to rename your setting, press to delete characters. Then enter the new name (up to
12 characters).
Press OK. (See Entering Text in
appendix C of the Basic User’s
Guide.)
If you do not want to rename your setting, press OK.
Making copies
Retrieving your favorite setting
When you are ready to use one of your favorite set of settings, you can recall it.
a
Press (COPY).
b
Press d or c to display Favorite.
c
Press Favorite.
d
Press the favorite setting you want to retrieve.
7
Rename your favorite setting
After you stored your favorite setting, you can rename it.
7
a
Press (COPY).
b
Press d or c to display
Favorite Settings.
c
Press Favorite Settings.
d
Press Rename.
e
Press the favorite setting you want to rename.
f
Enter the new name (up to
12 characters). (See Entering Text in
appendix C of the Basic User’s Guide.) g
Press OK.
7
53
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or
USB Flash memory drive
8
PhotoCapture Center™ operations
8
Memory cards,
USB Flash memory drive and folder structures
8
Your machine is designed to be compatible with modern digital camera image files, memory cards and USB Flash memory drives; however, please read the points below to avoid errors:
The image file extension must be .JPG
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be recognized).
Direct PhotoCapture Center™ printing must be performed separately from
PhotoCapture Center™ operations using the PC. (Simultaneous operation is not available.)
The machine can read up to 999 files on a memory card or USB Flash memory drive.
The DPOF file on the memory cards must
be in a valid DPOF format. (See DPOF
Please be aware of the following:
When printing an index or image, the
PhotoCapture Center™ will print all valid images, even if one or more images have been corrupted. Corrupted images will not be printed.
(memory card users)
Your machine is designed to read memory cards that have been formatted by a digital camera.
When a digital camera formats a memory card it creates a special folder into which it copies image data. If you need to modify the image data stored on a memory card with your PC, we recommend that you do not modify the folder structure created by the digital camera. When saving new or modified image files to the memory card, we also recommend you use the same folder your digital camera uses. If the data is not saved to the same folder, the machine may not be able to read the file or print the image.
(USB Flash memory drive users)
This machine supports USB Flash memory drives that have been formatted by Windows
®
.
54
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
Movie printing
You can print images from movie files that are stored on a memory card or USB Flash memory drive.
A movie file is automatically divided into
9 parts by movie recording times and is placed in 3 lines, then you can see and print the scenes that have been automatically divided.
Note
• You cannot choose a particular movie scene.
• You can use AVI or MOV movie file formats (Motion JPEG only). However, if an AVI file size is 1 GB or more (the shooting time is about 30 minutes) or a
MOV file size is 2 GB or more (the shooting time is about 60 minutes), these files cannot be printed.
8
Print Images
Print Index (Thumbnails)
The PhotoCapture Center™ assigns numbers for images (such as No.1, No.2,
No.3, and so on).
8
8
The PhotoCapture Center™ does not recognize any other numbers or file names that your digital camera or computer has used to identify the pictures. You can print a thumbnail page. This will show all the pictures on the memory card or USB Flash memory drive.
Note
Only file names that are 8 characters or less will be printed correctly on the index sheet.
a
Make sure you have put the memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.
Press (PHOTO CAPTURE). b
Press Index Print.
c
Press Index Sheet and choose
6 Images/Line or 5 Images/Line.
8
6 Images/Line 5 Images/Line
Print time for 5 Images/Line will be slower than 6 Images/Line, but the quality is better.
55
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 8 d
Do one of the following:
Press Print Setting to change the paper type or the paper size you are using.
If you do not want to change the
e
Press Paper Type.
Choose the paper type you are using,
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Brother BP71, Brother BP61 or
Other Glossy.
f
Press Paper Size.
Choose the paper size you are using,
Letter or A4.
g
Press Color Start to print.
Printing Photos
Before you can print an individual image, you have to know the image number.
a
Make sure you have put the memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.
Press (PHOTO CAPTURE). b
Print the Index. (See Print Index
c
Press Index Print.
d
Press Print Photos.
e
Enter the image number that you want to print from the Index page (Thumbnails).
After you have chosen the image numbers, press OK.
Note
• You can enter multiple numbers at one time by using a comma or a hyphen. For example, Enter 1,3,6 to print images No.1,
No.3 and No.6. Enter 1-5 to print images
No.1 to No.5.
• You can enter up to 12 characters
(including commas) for the image numbers you want to print.
8
56
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals f
Enter the number of copies you want either by pressing the number box directly and entering the number you want or by pressing + or -.
g
Do one of the following:
Press Print Setting to change
the print settings. (See page 59.)
If you do not want to change any settings, press Color Start to print.
Enhance Photos
You can edit and add effects to your photos and view them on the LCD before printing.
8
Note
The Enhance Photo feature is supported by technology from Reallusion,
Inc. a
Make sure you have put a memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.
Press (PHOTO CAPTURE). b
Press Enhance Photo.
Note
• Four thumbnails are displayed at a time with the current page number and total number of pages listed under the thumbnails.
• Press d or c repeatedly to scroll through all photos. Hold down d or c to fast-forward and fast-rewind through the thumbnail pages.
• Press to start Slide Show.
c
Press a photo from the thumbnails.
d
Press Enhance or Trim. You can also choose both together.
Press OK.
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive e
Do one of the following:
If you chose Enhance, go to step f.
If you chose Trim, go to step g.
f
Press the effect you wish to add.
Press OK.
Note
• You have 10 ways to add effects to your photo.
(Auto Correct)
The machine decides the suitable effect for your photo.
(Enhance Skin)
Best used for adjusting portrait photographs. It adjusts human skin color. Press d or c to adjust the level of contrast.
(Enhance Scenery)
Best used for adjusting landscape photographs. It highlights green and blue areas in your photo. Press d or c to adjust the level of contrast.
(Remove Red-Eye)
The machine will attempt to remove red-eye from your photo. If red-eye detection fails, you can press the
Try Again button to re-detect.
(Night Scene)
Night Scene is best used for adjusting night view photographs to make them more vivid.
(Fill Light)
Fill Light is best used for adjusting photographs against the light.
(Whiteboard)
Whiteboard is best used for adjusting photographs. It detects letters on a whiteboard in your photo and makes them more legible.
(Monochrome)
You can convert your photo to black & white.
(Sepia)
You can convert the color of your photo to sepia.
(Auto Correct & Remove Red-Eye)
The machine decides the suitable effects for your photo. Also, it will attempt to remove red-eye from your photo.
• There are some cases when red-eye may not be removed.
• When the face is too small in the image.
• When the face is turning too far up, down, left or right.
• After adding each effect, you can enlarge the view of the image by pressing go back to the original size, press
. To
.
• While the image is enlarged, you can move around the image with up ( ),
down ( ), left ( ) and right ( ).
• Press Cancel to return to the list of effects.
g
Adjust the red frame around your photo.
The part inside of the red frame will be printed.
Press + or - to enlarge or reduce the frame size.
Press a, b, d or c to move the position of the frame.
Press to rotate the frame.
Press OK when you have finished adjusting the frame setting.
Press OK to confirm.
Note
If your photo is very small or has irregular proportions you may not be able to trim the photo. The LCD will display
Image Too Small. or
Image Too Long.
8
57
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 8 h
Enter the number of copies you want either by pressing the number box directly and entering the number you want or by pressing + or -.
Press OK.
i
Do one of the following.
Press Print Setting and change
the print settings. (See page 59.)
If you do not want to change any settings, press Color Start to print.
DPOF printing
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation) created this standard to make it easier to print images from a digital camera.
If your digital camera supports DPOF printing, you will be able to choose on the digital camera display the images and number of copies you want to print.
When a memory card (Memory Stick™,
Memory Stick PRO™, Memory Stick Duo™,
Memory Stick PRO Duo™ SD or SDHC) containing DPOF information is put into your machine, you can print the chosen image easily.
a
Make sure you have put the memory card in the proper slot.
8
The machine will ask you if you want to use DPOF settings.
b
Press Yes.
c
Do one of the following:
Press Print Setting to change
the print settings. (See page 59.)
If you do not want to change any settings, press Color Start to print.
Note
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the print order that was created on the camera has been corrupted. Delete and recreate the print order using your camera to correct this problem. For instructions on how to delete or recreate the print order, refer to your camera manufacturer's support Web site or accompanying documentation.
58
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
PhotoCapture Center™ print settings
8
You can change the print settings for the next printing.
These settings are temporary, and the machine returns to its default settings
3 minutes after printing, unless you have set the Mode Timer to 2 minutes or less. (See
Note
You can save the print settings you use most often by setting them as the default.
(See Setting your changes as the new
Print Quality
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display
Print Quality.
c
Press Print Quality.
d
Press Normal or Photo.
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
8
Paper options
8
Paper Type
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Paper Type.
c
Press Paper Type.
d
Press the paper type you are using,
Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper,
Brother BP71, Brother BP61 or
Other Glossy.
8
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
Paper and print size
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Paper Size.
c
Press Paper Size.
d
Press the paper size you are using,
4"x 6", 5"x 7", Letter, Ledger, A4 or A3.
Do one of the following:
If you chose Letter or A4, go to
If you chose another size of paper,
8
8
59
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
e
Chapter 8
Press the Print Size.
Example: Printed position for Letter paper
1 2 3
3"x 4" 4"x 6" 3.5"x 5"
4
5"x 7"
5
6"x 8"
6
Max. Size f
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
Adjusting Brightness,
Contrast and Color
8
Brightness
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Brightness.
c
Press Brightness.
d
Press d to make a darker print or press
c
to make a lighter print.
Press OK.
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
8
Contrast
You can choose the contrast setting.
Increasing the contrast will make an image look sharper and more vivid.
8
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Contrast.
c
Press Contrast.
d
Press c to increase the contrast or press
d
to decrease the contrast.
Press OK.
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
Color Enhancement (True2Life™)
You can turn on the color enhancement
(True2Life™) feature to print more vivid images. Printing time will be slower.
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display True2Life.
c
Press True2Life.
d
Do one of the following:
If you want to customize the
White Balance, Sharpness or
Color Density, press On, and
If you do not want to customize, press Off.
e
Press White Balance, Sharpness or
Color Density.
f
Press d or c to adjust the degree of the setting.
Press OK.
8
60
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive g
Do one of the following:
If you want to customize another
color enhancement, repeat steps e to f.
If you want to change other settings, press to display the print setting menu and press the setting
you want to change. (See page 59.)
h
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
Note
• White Balance
This setting adjusts the hue of the white areas of an image. Lighting, camera settings and other influences will affect the appearance of white. The white areas of a picture may be slightly pink, yellow or some other color. By using this setting, you can correct that effect and bring the white areas back to pure white.
• Sharpness
This setting enhances the detail of an image, similar to adjusting the fine focus on a camera. If the image is not in true focus and you cannot see the fine details of the picture, then adjust the sharpness.
• Color Density
This setting adjusts the total amount of color in the image. You can increase or decrease the amount of color in an image to improve a washed out or weak picture.
Cropping
If your photo is too long or wide to fit the available space on your chosen layout, part of the image will automatically be cropped.
The factory setting is On. If you want to print the whole image, turn this setting to Off.
When you set Cropping to Off, also set
Borderless to Off. (See Borderless
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Cropping.
c
Press Cropping.
d
Press Off (or On).
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
Cropping: On
8
Cropping: Off
8
8
8
61
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 8
Borderless printing
This feature expands the printable area to the edges of the paper. Printing time will be slightly slower.
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Borderless.
c
Press Borderless.
d
Press Off (or On).
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
8
Print Date
You can print the date if it is already in the data on your photo. The date will be printed on the lower right corner. If the data doesn’t have the date information, you cannot use this function.
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display Print Date.
c
Press Print Date.
d
Press On (or Off).
e
If you do not want to change additional settings, press .
Press Color Start to print.
8
Note
The DPOF setting on your camera must be turned off to use the Print Date feature.
Setting your changes as the new default
8
You can save the print settings you use most often by setting them as the default settings.
These settings will stay until you change them again.
a
Press your new setting.
Repeat this step for each setting you want to change.
b
After changing the last setting, press
a
or b to choose Set New Default.
c
Press Set New Default.
d
Press Yes to confirm.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
Restoring all settings to the factory settings
8
You can restore the PhotoCapture settings
Print Quality, Paper Type,
Paper Size, Brightness, Contrast,
True2Life, Cropping, Borderless and
Print Date, that you have changed, to the factory settings.
a
Press Print Setting.
b
Press a or b to display
Factory Reset.
c
Press Factory Reset.
d
Press Yes to confirm.
e
Press Stop/Exit.
62
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
Scan to a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
8
Glass Scan Size
To scan a Legal, Ledger, A3 or A4 size document, you need to change the
Glass Scan Size setting. The default setting is Letter.
a
Press (SCAN).
b
Press to Media.
c
Press d or c to display
Glass Scan Size.
d
Press Glass Scan Size.
e
Press Letter, Legal, Ledger, A3 or
A4.
Note
• You can save the setting you use most often by setting it as the default. (See
Setting your changes as the new default on page 62.)
• This setting is only available for scanning documents from the scanner glass.
8
Auto Crop
You can scan multiple documents placed on the scanner glass. An individual document can be previewed on the LCD before you save it. When you choose Auto Crop, the machine will scan each document and create separate files. For example, if you place three documents on the scanner glass, the machine will scan and create three separate files. If you want to create a three-page file, choose PDF or TIFF for File Type.
(If you choose JPEG, each document is created as three separate files.)
1
8
1
2
3
2
1 0.4 in. (10 mm) or greater (top, left, right)
2 0.8 in. (20 mm) or greater (bottom)
Note
• Auto Crop works properly for all
Glass Scan Size settings.
• Auto Crop is supported by technology from Reallusion, Inc.
8
a
Make sure you have put the memory card or USB Flash memory drive in the proper slot.
b
Load your document.
c
Press (SCAN).
63
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 8 d
Press to Media.
e
Press d or c to display Auto Crop.
f
Press Auto Crop.
g
Press On.
h
If you do not want to change additional settings, press Black Start or
Color Start to start scanning. i
The number of the scanned documents appears on the LCD.
Press OK.
j
Press d or c to preview each document data.
k
Press Save All to save the data.
Note
• Auto Crop is available for paper with right angles of 90 degrees at all four corners. If one of the angles is not square,
Auto Crop cannot detect the document.
• If your document is too long or wide, this setting does not work properly.
• You must place the documents away from the edges of the scanner glass as shown in the illustration.
• You must place the documents at least
0.4 in. (10 mm) apart from each other.
• Auto Crop adjusts the skew of the document on the scanner glass, but if your document is skewed more than
10 degrees, this setting will not work.
• The ADF must be empty to use the
Auto Crop.
• The Auto Crop feature is available for up to a maximum of 16 documents depending on the size of your documents.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT take out the memory card or
USB Flash memory drive while
PHOTO CAPTURE is blinking to avoid damaging the card, USB Flash memory drive or the data stored on them.
How to set a new default
You can save the Scan to Media settings
(Quality, File Type,
Glass Scan Size and Auto Crop) you use most often by setting them as the default settings. These settings will stay until you change them again.
8
a
Press (SCAN).
b
Press to Media.
c
Press d or c to display
Set New Default.
d
Press Set New Default.
e
Press Yes to confirm.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
64
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PhotoCapture Center™: Printing photos from a memory card or USB Flash memory drive
How to reset to the factory settings
You can restore all the Scan to Media settings
(Quality, File Type,
Glass Scan Size and Auto Crop), that you have changed, to the factory settings.
a
Press (SCAN).
b
Press to Media.
c
Press d or c to choose
Factory Reset.
d
Press Factory Reset.
e
Press Yes to confirm.
f
Press Stop/Exit.
8
8
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
65
9
Printing photos from a camera
9
Printing photos directly from a
PictBridge camera
Your Brother machine supports the
PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect to and print photos directly from any
PictBridge compatible digital camera.
If your camera is using the USB Mass
Storage standard, you can also print photos from a digital camera without PictBridge.
(See Printing photos directly from a digital
camera (without PictBridge) on page 69.)
9
PictBridge requirements
To avoid errors, remember the following points:
The machine and the digital camera must be connected using a suitable USB cable.
The image file extension must be .JPG
(other image file extensions like .JPEG,
.TIF, .GIF and so on will not be recognized).
PhotoCapture Center™ operations are not available when using the PictBridge feature.
9
66
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing photos from a camera
Setting your digital camera
Make sure your camera is in PictBridge mode. The following PictBridge settings may be available from the LCD of your PictBridge compatible camera.
Depending on your camera some of these settings may not be available.
9
1
2
Camera Menu
Selections
Paper Size
Options
Paper Type
Layout
DPOF setting
Print Quality
Color
Enhancement
Print Date
Ledger, Letter, A3, A4,
4"
6",
Printer Settings
(Default setting)
Plain Paper, Glossy Paper,
Inkjet Paper, Printer Settings
(Default setting)
-
Borderless: On,
Borderless: Off,
Printer Settings
(Default setting)
Normal, Fine,
Printer Settings
(Default setting)
On, Off,
Printer Settings
(Default setting)
On, Off,
Printer Settings
(Default setting)
See DPOF printing on page 68 for more details.
If your camera is set to use the Printer Settings
(Default setting), the machine will print your photo using the following settings.
Settings
Paper Size
Paper Type
Layout
Print Quality
Color Enhancement
Print Date
Options
4"
6"
Glossy Paper
Borderless: On
Fine
Off
Off
When your camera does not have any menu selections, these settings are also used.
The name and availability of each setting depends on the specification of your camera.
Please refer to the documentation supplied with your camera for more detailed information on changing PictBridge settings.
9
67
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Chapter 9
Printing Images
Note
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash memory drive from the machine before connecting a digital camera.
a
Make sure that your camera is turned off. Connect your camera to the USB direct interface (1) on the machine using the USB cable.
1
1 USB direct interface
b
Turn on the camera.
When the machine has recognized the camera, the LCD shows
Camera Connected.
c
Choose the photo you want to print following the instructions from your camera.
When the machine starts printing a photo, the LCD will show Printing.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, do not connect any device other than a digital camera or USB Flash memory drive to the
USB direct interface.
9
DPOF printing
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation) created this standard to make it easier to print images from a digital camera.
If your digital camera supports DPOF printing, you will be able to choose on the digital camera display the images and number of copies you want to print.
Note
An Invalid DPOF File error can occur if the print order that was created on the camera has been corrupted. Delete and recreate the print order using your camera to correct this problem. For instructions on how to delete or recreate the print order, refer to your camera manufacturer's support Web site or accompanying documentation.
9
68
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing photos directly from a digital camera
(without PictBridge)
9
If your camera is using the USB Mass
Storage standard, you can connect your camera in storage mode. This enables you to print photos from your camera.
(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge
mode, see Printing photos directly from a
PictBridge camera on page 66.)
Note
The name, availability and operation differ among digital cameras. Please refer to the documentation supplied with your camera for detailed information, such as how to switch from PictBridge mode to USB mass storage mode.
Printing photos from a camera
Printing Images
Note
Remove any memory cards or USB Flash memory drive from the machine before connecting a digital camera.
a
Make sure that your camera is turned off. Connect your camera to the USB direct interface (1) on the machine using the USB cable.
9
1
1 USB direct interface
b
Turn on the camera.
c
Follow the steps in Print Images on page 55.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, do not connect any device other than a digital camera or USB Flash memory drive to the
USB direct interface.
9
69
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
A
Routine maintenance
Cleaning and checking the machine
A
Cleaning the outside of the machine
Clean the Touchscreen as follows:
IMPORTANT
• Turn off the power switch when you clean the Touchscreen.
• DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners
(including ethanol).
A
a
Clean the Touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
Clean the outside of the machine as follows:
IMPORTANT
• Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine will damage the outside surface of the machine.
• DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia.
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.
a
Pull the paper trays (1) completely out of the machine.
1
A
1
70
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b
Wipe the outside of the machine with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove dust.
c
Lift the output paper tray cover and remove anything that is stuck inside the paper tray.
d
Wipe the inside and outside of the paper tray with a dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove dust.
Routine maintenance
Cleaning the machine’s printer platen
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the machine from the AC power outlet before cleaning the printer platen to avoid an electrical shock.
A
a
Using both hands, use the finger holds on each side of the machine to lift the scanner cover into the open position.
b
Clean the machine’s printer platen (1) and the area around it, wiping off any scattered ink with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
e
Close the output paper tray cover and put the output paper tray firmly back in the machine.
2
1 3
IMPORTANT
DO NOT touch the plate (2) and lever (3).
Doing this may cause damage to the machine.
A
71
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the paper feed rollers
If the paper feed rollers are stained with ink, it may cause paper feed problems.
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
A
c
Lift the Jam Clear flap (2), and then clean the back side of the Paper Feed
Rollers (1) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
2
1
Note
If the paper support flap is open, close it, and then close the paper support.
b
Clean the front side of the Paper Feed
Rollers (1) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water, using a side-to-side motion.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
d
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
e
Re-connect the power cord.
Note
Do not use the machine again until the rollers are dry. Using the machine before the rollers are dry may cause paper feed problems.
1
72
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers
A
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
b
Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
Note
If the machine starts multiple-feeding the last few sheets of paper in the tray, clean the Base Pad (1) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
After cleaning, wipe the pad with a dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
Routine maintenance d
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers (1) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
Slowly turn the rollers so that the whole surface is cleaned.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
1
1 c
Open the Jam Clear Cover (1) at the back of the machine.
e
Clean the Back Paper Feed Rollers (1) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
Slowly turn the rollers so that the whole surface is cleaned.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
A
1
1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
73
Note
Do not touch the metal shaft.
f
Close the Jam Clear Cover.
Make sure the cover is closed completely.
g
Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
h
Re-connect the power cord.
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers for paper tray #2
A
a
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet. Pull tray #2 completely out of the machine.
Note
If the paper support flap is open, close it, and then close the paper support.
b
Clean the paper pick-up rollers for tray #2 (1) with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
Slowly turn the rollers so that the whole surface is cleaned.
After cleaning, wipe the rollers with a
dry, soft lint-free cloth to remove all moisture.
c
Put tray #2 firmly back in the machine.
d
Re-connect the power cord.
Checking the ink volume
Although an ink volume icon appears on the
LCD, you can use the ink menu to see a large graph showing the ink that is left in each cartridge.
a
Press .
b
Press Ink Volume.
The LCD shows the ink volume.
c
Press Stop/Exit.
Note
You can check the ink volume from your computer. (See Printing for Windows
®
or
Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the
Software User’s Guide.)
A
1
74
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Packing and shipping the machine
A
When you transport the machine, use the packing materials that came with your machine. If you do not pack the machine properly, any damage that may occur in transit may not be covered by your warranty.
IMPORTANT
It is important to allow the machine to
“park” the print head after a print job.
Listen carefully to the machine before unplugging it to make sure that all mechanical noise has stopped. Not allowing the machine to finish this parking process may lead to print problems and possible damage to the print head.
a
Unplug the machine from the telephone wall jack and take the telephone line cord out of the machine.
b
Unplug the machine from the AC power outlet.
c
Using both hands, use the finger holds on each side of the machine to lift the scanner cover into the open position.
Then unplug the interface cable from the machine, if it is connected.
d
Remove the orange protective part from the inside right corner of the machine.
Routine maintenance e
Gently close the scanner cover using the finger holds on each side.
WARNING
Be careful not to trap your fingers under the scanner cover.
Always use the finger holds provided on each side of the scanner cover when opening and closing it.
f
Open the ink cartridge cover.
g
Press the ink release levers to release the ink cartridges and then take out the ink cartridges. (See Replacing the ink
cartridges in appendix A of the Basic
User’s Guide.) h
Install the orange protective part and then close the ink cartridge cover.
A
75
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IMPORTANT
• Make sure the plastic tab on the right side of the orange protective part (1) clicks securely into place (2).
1 2
• If you are not able to find the orange protective part, DO NOT remove the ink cartridges before shipping. It is essential that the machine be shipped with either the orange protective part or the ink cartridges in position. Shipping without them will cause damage to your machine and may void your warranty.
i
Wrap the machine in the bag.
j
Pack the machine and the printed materials in the original carton with the original packing material as shown below. Do not pack the used ink cartridges in the carton.
Note
If you are returning your machine to
Brother as part of the Exchange Service, pack only the machine. Keep all separate parts and printed materials to use with your “Exchange” machine.
9
3
B
BB
4
D
8
10
6
2
7
1
C
5
A
A A k
Close the carton and tape it shut.
76
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
B
Glossary
B
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of these features depends on the model you purchased.
ADF (automatic document feeder)
The document can be placed in the ADF and scanned one page at a time automatically.
Auto Reduction
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.
Automatic Redial
A feature that enables your machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes if the fax did not go through because the line was busy.
Backup Print
Your machine prints a copy of every fax that is received and stored in memory.
This is a safety feature so you will not lose messages during a power failure.
Batch Transmission
(Black & white faxes only) As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes to the same fax number can be sent as one transmission.
Beeper Volume
Volume setting for the beep when you press a key or make an error.
Brightness
Changing the Brightness makes the whole image lighter or darker.
Broadcasting
The ability to send the same fax message to more than one location.
Caller ID
A service purchased from the telephone company that lets you see the number (or name) of the party calling you.
CNG tones
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during automatic transmission to tell the receiving machine that a fax machine is calling.
Coding method
Method of coding the information contained in the document. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine is capable of greater compression methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified
Modified Read (MMR) and JPEG, if the receiving machine has the same capability.
Communication error (Comm. Error)
An error during fax sending or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.
Compatibility group
The ability of one fax unit to communicate with another. Compatibility is assured between ITU-T Groups.
Contrast
Setting to compensate for dark or light documents, by making faxes or copies of dark documents lighter and light documents darker.
Delayed Fax
Sends your fax at a specified time later.
Density
Changing the Density makes the whole image lighter or darker.
Distinctive Ring
A subscriber service purchased from the telephone company that gives you another telephone number on an existing telephone line. The Brother machine uses the new number to simulate a dedicated fax line.
B
77
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dual Access
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled jobs into memory at the same time it is sending a fax from memory or receiving or printing an incoming fax.
Easy Receive
Enables your machine to respond to CNG tones if you interrupt a fax call by answering it.
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
Detects errors during fax transmission and resends the pages of the fax that had an error.
Extension telephone
A telephone using the same line as your fax but plugged into a separate wall jack.
External telephone
A telephone that is plugged into the
EXT. jack of your machine.
F/T Ring Time
The length of time that the Brother machine rings (when the Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up a voice call that it answered.
Fax Forwarding
Sends a fax received into the memory to another pre-programmed fax number.
Fax Journal
Lists information about the last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means
Transmit. RX means Receive.
Fax Preview
If you turn on Fax Preview you will be able to view incoming faxes on the LCD by pressing the Fax Preview key on the control panel or the Fax Preview button on the Touchscreen.
Fax Receive Code
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone.
Fax Storage
You can store received faxes in memory.
78
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Fax tones
The signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines while communicating information.
Fax/Tel
You can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use this mode if you are using a telephone answering device
(TAD).
Fine resolution
Resolution is 203
196 dpi. It is used for small print and graphs.
Gray Scale
The shades of gray available for copying, scanning and faxing photographs.
Group number
A combination of One Touch and
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location for Broadcasting.
Help list
A printout of the complete Menu table that you can use to program your machine when you do not have the Basic User's
Guide with you.
Innobella™
Innobella™ is a range of genuine consumables offered by Brother. For best quality results Brother recommends
Innobella™ Ink and Paper.
Journal Period
The pre-programmed time period between automatically printed Fax
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax
Journal on demand without interrupting the cycle.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
The LCD screen on the machine that shows interactive messages during On-
Screen Programming and shows the date and time when the machine is idle.
Manual fax
You can lift the handset of the external telephone or you can press Hook to hear the receiving fax machine answer before you press Black Start or Color Start to begin sending.
Memory Receive
Receives faxes into the machine's memory when the machine is out of paper.
Menu mode
Programming mode for changing your machine's settings.
OCR (optical character recognition)
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR or Presto! PageManager software application converts an image of text to text you can edit.
One Touch
Keys on the machine’s control panel where you can store numbers for easy dialing. You can store a second number on each key if you hold down Shift as you press the One Touch key.
Overseas Mode
Makes temporary changes to the fax tones to accommodate noise and static on overseas telephone lines.
Paging
This feature enables your machine to call your pager when a fax is received into its memory. The machine will also page for voice messages.
Pause
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in the dialing sequence while you are dialing using the dial pad or while you are storing
One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.
Press the Redial/Pause key on the control panel or the Pause button on the
Touchscreen as many times as needed for longer pauses.
PhotoCapture Center™
Allows you to print digital photos from your digital camera at high resolution for photo quality printing.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Glossary
Photo resolution (B&W only)
A resolution setting that uses varying shades of gray for the best representation of photographs.
PictBridge
Allows you to print photos directly from your digital camera at high resolution for photo quality printing.
Polling
The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax messages.
Pulse (Canada only)
A form of rotary dialing on a telephone line.
Quick Dial List
A listing of names and numbers stored in
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in numerical order.
Real Time Transmission
When memory is full, you can send faxes in real time.
Remaining jobs
You can check which jobs are waiting in memory and cancel jobs individually.
Remote Access Code
Your own four-digit code (--- ) that allows you to call and access your machine from a remote location.
Remote Retrieval Access
The ability to access your machine remotely from a touch-tone telephone.
Resolution
The number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch. See: Standard, Fine, Super Fine and Photo.
Ring Delay
The number of rings before the machine answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.
Ring Volume
Volume setting for the machine's ring.
B
79
Scanning
The process of sending an electronic image of a paper document into your computer.
Scan to Media
You can scan a black & white or color document into a memory card or USB
Flash memory drive. Black & white images can be in TIFF or PDF file format and color images can be in PDF or JPEG file format.
Search
An electronic, numerical or alphabetical listing of stored One Touch, Speed Dial and Group numbers.
Speed Dial
A pre-programmed number for easy dialing.
Standard resolution
203
97 dpi. It is used for regular size text and quickest transmission.
Station ID
The stored information that appears on the top of faxed pages. It includes the sender's name and fax number.
Super Fine resolution (B&W)
392
203 dpi. Best for very small print and line art.
TAD (telephone answering device)
You can connect an external telephone answering device or answering machine to the EXT. jack of your machine.
Telephone Answer Code
(For Fax/Tel mode only)
When the machine answers a voice call, it pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at an extension telephone by pressing this code (# 5 1).
Temporary settings
You can choose certain options for each fax transmission and copy without changing the default settings.
Tone
A form of dialing on the telephone line used for touch-tone telephones.
80
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Transmission
The process of sending faxes over the phone lines from your machine to the receiving fax machine.
Transmission Verification Report
A listing for the last fax sent, that shows its date, time and number.
True2Life™
Adjusts the color in the image for better print quality by improving sharpness, white balance and color density.
User Settings
A printed report that shows the current settings of the machine.
WLAN Report
A printed report that shows the result of the WLAN Connection.
C
Index
Numerics
2 in 1 ID Copy
..........................................46
A
Access codes, storing and dialing
Apple Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
B
Broadcasting
............................................13
setting up Groups for
............................37
C
Caller ID
...................................................29
Caller ID history
....................................32
Add to One Touch Dial
Add to Speed Dial
..............................32
Delete
................................................32
Send a fax
..........................................32
Caller ID History report
Setting up your area code
Canceling
Fax Forwarding
.............................. 22
,
Fax Storage
..........................................22
jobs awaiting redial
...............................16
Paging
............................................ 22
,
Cleaning paper feed roller
....................................72
paper pick-up roller
...............................73
printer platen
.........................................71
Connecting two-line external TAD or telephone
ControlCenter
See Software User's Guide.
Copy
2 in 1 ID
................................................ 46
book
..................................................... 49
density
.................................................. 47
duplex
................................................... 50
enlarge/reduce
..................................... 42
Favorite settings
................................... 53
ink save mode
...................................... 47
page layout (N in 1)
.............................. 43
poster
................................................... 43
quality
................................................... 41
skew adjustment
.................................. 48
sort (ADF only)
..................................... 46
thin paper
............................................. 48
using ADF
............................................ 46
Watermark
............................................ 49
using a media card
............................ 49
using a paper document
using a template
................................ 49
using a USB Flash memory drive
D
Dialing access codes and credit card numbers
............................................... 33
Caller ID history
.................................... 32
dial prefix
................................................ 4
Groups (Broadcasting)
Outgoing Call
....................................... 32
Direct printing from a non-PictBridge camera
from a PictBridge camera
Dual Access
............................................ 13
Duplex (2-sided) copy
...................................................... 50
fax
........................................................ 12
C
81
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
F
Fax codes changing
...............................................23
Remote Access Code
Fax Forwarding changing remotely
,
programming a number
Fax Storage
.............................................20
printing from memory
............................20
turning off
..............................................22
turning on
..............................................20
Fax, from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Fax, stand-alone receiving at end of conversation
Fax Forwarding
..................................24
into PC
...............................................21
into the memory
.................................18
out of paper reception
Paging
................................................19
printing from memory
reducing to fit on paper
retrieving from a remote site
,
sending
.................................................10
at end of conversation
Broadcasting
......................................13
canceling from memory
contrast
..............................................10
delayed batch transmission
delayed fax
.........................................15
duplex (2-sided)
.................................12
from memory (Dual Access)
manual
...............................................12
overseas
............................................15
Real Time Transmission
Resolution
..........................................11
return to factory setting
set new default
...................................11
Function Lock
.............................................6
G
Groups for Broadcasting
I
ID Copy
................................................... 46
Ink cartridges checking ink volume
............................. 74
J
Jacks
Convert to RJ11 jack triplex adapter
EXT
TAD
................................................... 31
L
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Brightness
.............................................. 4
Dim Timer
............................................... 4
Help List
............................................... 40
M
Macintosh
See Software User's Guide.
Manual transmission
......................................... 12
Memory Storage
........................................ 1
Mode, entering
Timer
...................................................... 5
Movie printing
.......................................... 55
N
Network
Printing
See Network User's Guide.
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
O
One Touch setting up from Caller ID history
setting up from outgoing calls
Outgoing Call
Add to One Touch Dial
Add to Speed Dial
................................ 32
Delete
................................................... 32
Send a fax
............................................ 32
82
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
P
Packing and shipping the machine
Paging
......................................................19
PaperPort™12SE with OCR
See Software User's Guide. See also Help in the PaperPort™12SE application.
PhotoCapture Center™
Adding Effect
........................................56
DPOF printing
.......................................58
from PC
See Software User's Guide.
Photo Effects
Auto Correct
.......................................56
Enhance Scenery
..............................56
Enhance Skin
.....................................56
Fill Light
.............................................56
Monochrome
......................................56
Night Scene
.......................................56
Remove Red-Eye
..............................56
Sepia
..................................................56
Trim
....................................................56
Whiteboard
........................................56
Print settings
Borderless
..........................................62
Brightness
..........................................60
Contrast
.............................................60
Cropping
............................................61
Paper type & size
...............................59
Print Date
...........................................62
Quality
................................................59
Return to factory setting
Set new default
..................................62
Printing index
..................................................55
photos
................................................56
Scan to Media auto crop
............................................63
memory card
......................................63
USB Flash memory
............................63
PictBridge
DPOF Printing
.......................................68
Power failure
..............................................1
Presto! PageManager
See Software User's Guide. See also Help in the Presto! PageManager application.
Print fax from memory
...................................20
report
....................................................40
Printing
See Software User's Guide.
Q
Quick Dial
Access codes and credit card numbers
............................................... 33
Broadcasting
........................................ 13
deleting Groups
................................. 38
using Groups
..................................... 13
Group dial changing
............................................ 38
setting up Groups for
Broadcasting
..................................... 37
One Touch setting up from Caller ID history
setting up from outgoing calls
Speed Dial setting up from Caller ID history
setting up from outgoing calls
R
Reducing copies
................................................... 42
incoming faxes
..................................... 26
Remote Retrieval
..................................... 23
commands
............................................ 24
getting your faxes
................................. 25
remote access code
............................. 23
Remote Setup
See Software User's Guide.
Reports
.................................................... 39
Caller ID History Report
Fax Journal
.......................................... 40
Journal Period
................................... 39
Help List
............................................... 40
how to print
........................................... 40
Network Configuration
Quick Dial List
...................................... 40
Transmission Verification
User Settings
........................................ 40
WLAN Report
....................................... 40
Resolution setting for next fax
................................ 11
Restricted users
........................................ 8
C
83
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
S
Scanning
See Software User's Guide.
Security
Secure function lock administrator password
restricted users
....................................8
Shipping the machine
..............................75
Sleep Mode
................................................3
Speed Dial setting up from Caller ID history
setting up from outgoing calls
T
TAD (telephone answering device), external
....................................................31
with two-line jack
...................................31
Telephone line roll over lines
.........................................30
two-line telephone system
Troubleshooting checking ink volume
..............................74
Two-line telephone system
V
Volume, setting beeper
.....................................................2
ring
..........................................................1
speaker
...................................................2
W
Warranties (Printed / In the box)
Windows
®
See Software User's Guide.
Wireless Network
See Quick Setup Guide and Network
User's Guide.
84
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.
1 rue Hôtel de Ville,
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6
Visit us on the World Wide Web http://www.brother.com/
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement